Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (152 trang)

pre 14 jan english 7 preparing date 22809 period 1 teaching date ¤n tëp kióm tra i objectives to revise the most important grammar points in grade 6 to present the necessary materials method to stu

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (683.02 KB, 152 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Preparing date:.22/8/09 Period:1


Teaching date

¤n TËp KiÓm tra



<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- To revise the most important grammar points in grade 6.


- To present the necessary materials, method to study in grade 7.
- T check Ss’ knowledge after the summer holiday.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to be ready to learn.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Text book ,pen ,chalks .


<b>III. Teaching procedures :</b>
<i><b>1. class settlement :</b></i>


Attendence : 7A :...7B :……….




<i><b>2. Oral test:</b></i>


- T checks the preparation of Ss


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>



A. Warm- up:


- Ss play the game : Hangman


- Give some questions to Ss about their summer vacation:
+ Do you have a good and interesting summer vacation?
+ Where did you spend your summer vacation ?


+ What did you do?
+ Who did you go with?


+ How long did you stay there?


<b>B. Presentation: </b>
<b> * Theory :</b>


<b> 1 . Thêm đuôi ing vào các động từ sau :</b>


Example: play----playing


1.Write - ... 5.Ride - ...


2.Walk - ... 6.Watch - ...


3.Go - ... 7.Swim - ...


4.Drive - ... 8.Skip - ...


<b> 2 .Đánh dấu X vào các câu trả lời đúng :</b>



1.Lien likes... .She usually swims and does aerobics.


sports music games


2.The weather is often... in spring.


cool warm hot cold




3...are you going to stay here ? For 2 weeks.


How long How often How much How many


4.We ...swim in the winter. It's too cold.


<b>3 . §äc, rồi trả lời các câu hỏi sau:</b>


Vui and her friends are going to camp for three days in SAPA.Vui is going to bring a
tent and some food . Lan is going to bring a ball. Ly is going to bring her camera to take
some photos. Nga and Mai are going to bring some drinks.


1.Where are they going to camp ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

...
3. What are they going to do there ?


...
4.Who is going to bring drinks ?



...


<b> * Revise:</b>


- Revise all grammar points Ss have learnt in grade 6.


<i><b>4.Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the key points .
- Repeat the main knowelege .


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Prepare: 24/8/09 Period 2nd :

Unit 1: Back to school

<b>.</b>
<b> T: Lesson 1 : A1 - 2</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Language functions presented: revise and develop the way of greeting and introducing
oneself.


- Structures: Nice to meet you, Nice to see you.
- Skill developed: 4 skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures :</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement :</b></i>



Attendence : 7A :...7B :………


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- T checks the preparation of Ss
3. New lesson:


<b>A. Warm - up:</b>


- Ask Ss some questions:


+ Are you happy to be back again?
+ Do you have any new friends?


+ What do you say to your friends when you first meet after the summer
vacation?


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Introduction:


- Introduce the situation of speaking.


Preparation:


- Nice to meet you.
- Nice to see you.


- Ask Ss to listen to the dialogues (a) & (b) with their book closed.


- T writes on the BB:


- Nice to meet you.
- Nice to see you.


- Give the meaning and the situation to say those words.


- Rất vui đợc gặp bạn ( Dùng trong trờng hợp khi bạn đợc giới thiệu lần
đầu tiên )


- Ask Ss listen to the dialogue again and read after.
- Ask Ss to open the book and read the text silently.


<b>+ Practice 1:</b>


 Pair / group work:


- Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue (a) in group of 3 then change roles.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue (b) in pair, then change roles.


- Ask two pair to practice reading in front of the class.
+ Ss answer the questions:


- What is the new girl’s name?
- What class is she in?


- Who in the dialogue also in the class 7A?


- Ask Ss to write down the answers in their note books.



<b>+ Practice 2</b>: Listen, complete the dialogue:


- Ask Ss to look at exercise 4 in the book. Tell them to look at the dialoges (a) &
(b) and the words and expressions in the box.


- Ask Ss to choose the right words and expressions.


- Ask ss to listen to the recording and complete the dialogue.
- Play once again for Ss to check.




<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Give more situation for Ss to practice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Review the key points.


- Do Ex. A1 & A2 in workbook.


______________________________________________________________________


Prepare:24/8/09

Unit 1: Back to school

<b>.</b>


<b>T: Period 3: Lesson 2: A3 - A5</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text, practice formal greeting and
distinguish the formal and informal greeting.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1. Organization:</b></i>


-Attendance : ...7A:...
...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Using cues to make dialogues in pairs:
a, Hello/ nice / meet / too.


b, Hi / pleased / see / again / too.


c, Morning / glad / meet / new classmate / Hoa.
3. New lesson:


<b>A. Warm - up:</b>


- Give some questions:


+ Are there any new students in your class?
+ What is his / her name?


+ How do you say when you first meet him / her?


<b>B. Presentation:</b>



<i><b>a, A3: Read and answer:</b></i>


- Teach some new words:


still: vÉn lots of: rÊt nhiÒu miss: nhí / lì


different: kh¸c nhau translation: dịch / phiên dịch unhappy >< happy
Suggested questions:


+ Hoa: - from...


- staying with...
- lots of friends?
- old / new school?


- happy / unhappy? why?
- Ask Ss to read silently.


- Ask ss to read and answer the questions.
a, She is from Hue.


b, She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c, No, she doesn’t.


d, Her new school is bigger than her old one.
e, Because she misses her parents and her friends.


- Ss give the summary of the text, using the answers above.



<i><b>b. A4: Listen and practice:</b></i>


- Set the situation and ask Ss to give the way to practice.


- Play the tape twice for Ss to practice listening , then Ss repeat.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again, pay attention to the rhythm and the
intonation.


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.


<i><b>c, A5: Listening comprehension:</b></i>


- Set the situation.
- Give open prediction:


Which picture is formal / informal?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Call some Ss to repeat the conversation.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Make situation in which Ss practice greeting in both 2 ways, formal and
informal.


a, Lan / Mai.
b, Miss Hoa / Van.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>



- Do Ex. A3 & A4 in the workbook.


_____________________________________________________________________


Prepare: 24/8/09

Unit 1: Back to school

<b>.</b>


<b>T: Period 4: Lesson 3: B1 - B2</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about personal information and introduce
others.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1. Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...
...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- S1 : Do Ex A3 ( a )
- S2 : Do Ex A3 ( b )


- The rest do Ex A4 orally.
3. New lesson:



<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Show some cards and let Ss practice with those cards:


<b> Name</b>: Peter Pike <b>Name</b>: Le Thi Mai


<b> Age</b>: 13 <b> Age</b>: 15


<b> Add</b>: 20 Le Loi street <b>Add</b>: 15 Tranphu street.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<i><b>1. B1: Listen, practice and answer:</b></i>


- Teach the new words:


family name / surname: hä
middle name: tªn lãt.
- Give gap- filling:


- This is... ... ,Hoa.
- She is ... years old.


- She lives at ... Tran Hung Dao Street.


- Ss listen to the tape with book closed, then fill in the gaps.
- Ss compare their notes with each other.


- Ss listen again to check their answers.



- Ss listen once again with books open and answers the questions.


<i><b>2. B2: Write: Complete the dialogue:</b></i>


- Revise the Wh- questions with wordsquare:


<b>W H E R E W</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

- Ss find the question words then give remarks about their use.
Who What Where Which How


- Ss read the dialogue in B2 and use the question word to fill in the gaps.Then
compare notes.


- Ask two pairs to read the dialogue aloud and check the answers.
- Get ss to practice readinmg the dialogue in pairs.


- Give some remarks.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Make dialogues in pairswith this given form:


<i><b>5. </b></i>
<i><b>Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex B1 & B2.


- Prepare the next lesson: B4 & B5.



______________________________________________________________________


Prepare: 24/8/09

Unit 1: Back to school

<b>.</b>


<b> T: Period 5: Lesson 4: B4 - B5</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about the distance with “ How far is
it from ... to ... ? ”


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1. Organization:</b></i>


-Attendance : ...7A:...
...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Two Ss make a conversation about personal information, then complete this student’s
card.


<b>Student s card</b>’


<b>Name:</b>
<b>Age:</b>
<b>Class:</b>


<b>Adress:</b>


3. New lesson:


<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Give some questions:
- What’s your name?
- Where do you live?


- How do you go to school?
- Is it near here ?


- Show the picture of Hoa.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


<i><b>a, Present the dialogue:</b></i>


- Ss listen to the dialogue once with book closed.
- Write model sentences on the board:


+ How far is it from your house to school?
+ How far is it from your house to the market ?
+ It’s about one kilometer/ five hundreds meters.
- T explains:


How far...? : for distance
from ... to ... : places.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

about : the distance.


<i><b>b, Practice:</b></i>


- Give word- cue drill:


<i><b>The market : 300 m.</b></i>
<i><b>The post- office : 500 m.</b></i>
<i><b>The movie- theater : 2 km.</b></i>
<i><b>School : 1 km</b></i>


- example exchange:


A: <i>How far is it from your house to the</i>
<i> market?</i>


B: <i>It is about three hundreds meters.</i>


c, Production:


- Ss practice asking and answering about the distances of their own.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Call one S to tell about him/ herself:
+ Name:


+ Address:


+ Distance from home to school:


+ Means of transport:


- Ask the others to talk about him/ her with what he/ she has just said.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Write about these people:


a, Hoa / 13 years old / 16 Le Loi Street / 2 km / bike.
b, Hung / 15 years old / 23 Tran Phu Street / 500 m / walk.


Prepare: 3/9/09

Unit 1: Back to school

<b>.</b>


<b>T: Period 6: Lesson 5: B6</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk well about the distance and personal
information.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1. Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...
...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- S2 : do part b


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A.Warm- up:</b>


- T says: I live on TranPhu street.


It’s about one kilometer from my house to school.
What about you?


- Ask two Ss to talk about themselves.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<b>1. Listen and write:</b>
<i><b>a, Pre- listening:</b></i>


- set the scene: Lan and Hoa are talking
- T draws on the board:


Lan’s house


School post- office


theater


- T asks : How many distances ?
- Write on the board.



- Checking instructions.


<i><b> b, While- listening:</b></i>


- Ss listen to the tape and write the numbers.
- Ss compare their notes with the others.
- Ss listen once again to check their answers.
- Call one S to write the answers on the board.


<i><b>c, Post- listening:</b></i>


- Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the four distances.


<b>2. Survey:</b>


- Draw the table on the board:


<b>S1</b> <b>S2</b> <b>S3</b>


<b>Name</b>
<b>Address</b>
<b>Distance</b>
<b>Transport</b>


- T gives intructions:
- Work in groups of 3.


- Take turns to ask each other.
- Give examples. ( T and Ss )
- Ss work in groups.



<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- One S tell the class the result of his survey.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex in workbook.


Prepare: 3/9/09
T:...


Period 7: Unit 2: Personal information.


Lesson 1: A1- A2 .


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To enrich ss' vocabulary about the topic.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- After the lesson Ss will be able to know how to speak on the phone .


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures :</b>
<i><b> 1. Class oganization:</b></i>


- Attendance: ...7A:...
...7B:...



<i><b>2.Oral test:</b></i>


- S1 & S2 : do the given Ex.
- S3 & S4 : Answer T’s questions.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Give a list of numbers and ask Ss to read them aloud:
1 5 9 8 7
6 3 4 0 2
- Remind Ss the way to pronounce the number : 0
+ 2 ways: - oh


- zezo.


- Call some Ss to read those numbers aloud.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


a, A1: Read:


- Introduce the way to read the telephone numbers:
+ Read each number.


+ If there have two similar numbers, read : “ double + number”
Eg: 11: double one. 44: double four


+ If there have three similar numbers, read : “ triple + number”


Eg: 999: triple nine. 777: triple seven.


- Elicit some new words from ss:


telephone directory/ code/ …


- Give somes examples:


837058 : eight three seven zero five eight.
822086 : eight double two zero eight six


0986967414 : zero nine eight six nine six seven four one four One reads the
address, another reads the phone.


- SS are supposed to practice in pairs.
- Pairs take turns to act out.


- Give some remarks
b, A2: Listen and write:


- Call one Ss to present the way to say the telephone numbers.
- Play the tape for Ss to practice listening the telephone numbers.
- Play tape once again and ask Ss to write down the numbers they hear.
- Ask Ss to compare their answers with the partners’.


- Play tape for the last time and ask Ss to check.
- Call some Ss to give the correct answers .
- Give the keys :


a, 8251654 b, 8250514


c, 8521936 d, 8351793
e, 8237041 f, 8821652


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind ss the way to ask and answer the phone numbers.
- Ask ss to write the phone numbers in words:


a. 048765499
b. 01686661425
c. 01234567890
d. 0984445550


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

- Learn by heart new words


_____________________________________________________________________


Preparing date:7/9/09
T:


Period 8.Unit 2:Personal information

<b>.</b>


Lesson 2: A3-A4


<b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To practice speaking and listening on the phone .


- To develop skills especially listening and speaking.
- After the lesson, Ss can speak on the phone with others .


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exercise book, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class oganization:</b></i>


-Attendence : ……. 7A:...


...7B………




<i><b> 2.Oral test:</b></i>


- S1 & S2 : do the given Ex.


- S3 & S4 : write the phone numbers given :
a. 0908789007


b. 0123666843
c. 600779
d. 875675


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>



- Play game : slap the boarb


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


c, A3: Listen:


- Play tape once , Ss practice listening with the book closed and ask them to note the
vocab.


+excuse me :
+sorry :


+yes ? / pardon ?


- Ask Ss to note the telephone number of Hoa.
- Ask Ss to give the question that Lan has asked.


- Get Ss to listen the dialogue again and note the information .
- Ss are suppose to elicit their partner`s telephone numbers
- Get Ss to practice with their real phone numbers at seats .
b. A4: Listen and read . Then answer the questions :


- Introduce the dialogue by asking some questions eg: who are they ? what are they
doing ? what are they talking about ? Can you guess ?


-T asks Ss to look at the picture at P.21and answer the questions.


<i><b>( Phong and Tam )</b></i>


( They are talking on the phone.)



- Ss look at the dialogue and listen to the tape first , note the vocabulary.
- T explains new key points:


+ The future simple tense:
(+): S + will + V


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

No, S + won’t.


+ <i>a movie/film</i> :phim.


+ free : rảnh dỗi


+ <i>Would you like to...?</i> : Bắt đầu lời mời một cách lÞch sù.
eg: Would you like to come to my house?


<i> +don't +V :cÊm ,kh«ng</i>


<i> +let's =let us +V :h·y , cïng </i>


- Ss listen to the tape once again then practice in pairs change the role in silent.
- Call some pairs perform before the class, others listen and remark


- Read again and answer the questions: one asks , another answers in pairs .
- Call some pairs practice , others remark and correct on the boarb.


- T gives the right answers: <i>a, Phong and Tam.</i>


<i>b, They will see a movie.</i>
<i>c, They will meet at 6.45.</i>



<i>d, They will meet in front of the theater.</i>


- Ss copy the answers.


<b>4, Consolidation :</b>


-repeat the main structures and vocubulary.
-make a similar dialogue about themselves.


<b>5, Homework :</b>


- learn new words and dialogue A4 by heart .
- do exercise 3 in workbook.


- prepare for the next lesson .


.


………


Preparing date:7/9/09


T…


Period 9 :


<b> Unit 2 : Personal information.</b>


Lesson 3 : A5



<b>I. Objectives : </b>


- After the lesson, ss can speak on the phone politely .
- To develop the skills especially speaking and listening .


<b>II. Preparation :</b>


- Teaching plan, textbook ,workbook ,tape and cassette .


<b>III. Teaching process :</b>
<b>1. Class oganization:</b>


Attendence : 7A………. 7B ………


<b>2Oral test:</b>


- Call some Ss read A4 and answer T' questions by heart.
- One does ex3 on the board


- Others observe and correct.


<b>3. New lesson :</b>
<i><b>A. Warm up :</b></i>


<i>Play game : Lucky numbers :</i>


1. Lucky number .2 .What is your telephone number ?
3. How do you go to school ? 4 . Lucky number.
5. Make an eg with "don't". 6. Are you free tonight ?


7. Lucky number 8. What will you do tomorrow evening ?


<i><b>B. Presentation :</b></i>


a,A5: Listen. Then write the answers. :
- Give some guided questions:


<i>Do you sometimes go to the movies?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<i>How do you get to the theater?</i>


- T plays the tape , Ss listen first.


-T plays tape again , Ss get information then compare their answers with their partners
- Call some to give the answers.


- Play the tape once again, Ss check their keys.
- Ss give the answers T helps if nessesary :
a, 8 545 545


b, a movie


c, Lan' s house
d, a bus


- Ss copy the answers.


<i>b, A6.Read then answer.</i>


-T introduces some more ways to phone .



Eg : when the person you want to meet is out, what will you say if you are the caller
and when you are the receiver what will you say ?


-T elicits Ss some ways then start new lesson.


- Ss practice the dialogue A6 in pairs then call some perform before the class.


-T introduce some vocab : + Can I speak to…. ?


+ out>< back :


- T guides Ss to answer the questions : one asks , another answers then call some pairs
practice before the class ,others correct and give the correct keys.


Keys :a, Phong is (calling)
b, Han is.


c, About Lan.


d, At about six o'clock.
e, After six.


<i>c, A7.Play with words.</i>


- Ss pratice listening and reading aloud after tape.
- Note the intonation when ss repeat after the tape.
- Some Ss practice before the class.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>



- Remind ss the way to use the Future simple tense.
-Make some examples.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex4,5 in the workbook.


- Learn A6 and new words by heart.
- Prepare the next lesson: B1, B2 .


.***** .


……… ………


Preparing date:7/9/09
T:


Period 10:



Unit 2 :Personal information


<b> Lesson 4 :B. My birthday(B1,2)</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To practice listening comprehension to the ordinal numbers and the dates .
- After the lesson, Ss can speak and write well the ordinal numbers, and dates.
- To develop the main skills espcially listening and speaking .


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



- Textbook, workbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement: </b></i>


Attendence 7A:...7B………..7C………..7D………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

-Others observe and correct if necessary.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Give a game , Ss practice the numbers.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


a, B1: Listen and repeat:


- Ss look at the picture in this part and listen to the T.


- T explains the task: Today we are learning about the ordinal numbers.
- T plays the tape once for Ss to practice listening.


- T explains: the ordinal numbers are used to show the dates in months . They are
formed by adding “th” after cardinal numbers.


Eg : First (1st<sub>): thø nhÊt, ngµy mïng mét</sub>



Second (2nd<sub>):thø hai, ngµy mïng hai</sub>


Third (3rd<sub>): thø ba, ngµy mùng ba</sub>


Fifth (5th<sub>) : thứ năm, ngày mùng năm</sub>


Ninth (9th<sub>) : thø chÝn, ngµy mïng chÝn</sub>


Twelfth (12th<sub>) : thø 12, ngµy 12</sub>


Twentieth (20th<sub>) :thø 20, ngµy 20</sub>


- T notes the way to read and write the suffix (th),note the pronunciation.
- T plays tape and pauses at each number for Ss to repeat aloud.


- Call some Ss to read those numbers aloud.


- Get Ss practice reading aloud through some big festivals in VN and their meanings.


Eg : 2-9,20-11,30-4, 22-4, 1-5….


b, B2: Listen and write the dates:


- T introduces by giving an eliciting question:


What is this? It is a calendar


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape once and write the dates they can hear.
- Ss are supposed to compare their answers with their partners’.


- Call some Ss to give their answers before the class, others listen .


- T plays tape again, and pauses at each date for Ss to check their answers.
- T calls some read the dates they have heard , others write on the boarb.
- T gives the right answers :


<i>- The first of July.</i>
<i>- The nineteenth.</i>
<i>- The sixth. </i>
<i>- The fourteenth. </i>
<i>- The seventeenth. </i>
<i>- The thirty- first. </i>


- Ss copy the answers in their notebooks.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- T reminds Ss the ordinal numbers.


- Ss practice speaking about theirbirthdays.


<i><b> 5. Homework:</b></i>


- Write the cardinal numbers from 1st<sub> to 31</sub>st<sub> by heart.</sub>


- Do ex1 in the workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


&&&& ..



……… ………


Preparing date:7/9/09
T:


Period 11 :


Unit 2: Personal information

<b>.</b>


<b> Lesson 5: B3,4.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- Develop the main skills especially listening.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exbook , tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


<i><b> Attendence : 7A:</b><b>………</b><b>.7B</b><b>……… ………</b><b>7C</b></i> <i><b>.7D...</b></i>
<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Some Ss write and say the ordinal numbers on the board.


- S2 & S3 : write some important festival dates in Vietnam, also in other countries


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>



- Give a game : <i>Pelmanism:</i>


<i>1</i> <i>June</i> <i> 7</i> <i>July</i>


<i>2</i> <i>March</i> <i> 8</i> <i>January</i>


<i>3</i> <i>September</i> <i> 9</i> <i>February</i>


<i>4</i> <i>August</i> <i> 10</i> <i>April</i>


<i>5</i> <i>October</i> <i> 11</i> <i>December</i>


<i>6</i> <i>November</i> <i> 12</i> <i>May</i>


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


a,B3. Write the months in order from first to twelfth:


- Ss look at the moths table of a years and listen to the task.
- T asks Ss to write the months in the table in the correct order.
- Call some Ss write them on the BB.


- Ask the others to practice reading orally.


- Check Ss’ writing on the BB and correct the mistakes if necessary.
- Get the class to read the months aloud, then ask some Ss to read aloud.
- T notes the pronunciation, orders Ss learn the months by heart at home.
b, B4. Listen. Then practice with a partner :



- Ss look at the picture at p.25, then answer the questions.


<i>- How many people are there in the picture?</i>
<i>- Who are they?</i>


<i>- Can you guess what Mr Tan is asking Hoa?</i>


- T plays the tape and asks Ss to listen to the dialogue once without looking at the book.
- Ask Ss to repeat what Mr Tan has asked Hoa.


- T plays the tape once again,note the vocab.
+ Date of birth : ngµy sinh


+ Nervous :căng thẳng
+ Don't worry : đừng lo


- Ask Ss to say what Hoa has answered.
- Play the tape for the last .


- Ss listen to the tape while looking at the book.


- T explains the prepositions: <i><b>on </b></i>used before dates of months.


- Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs.


- Call some pairs to perform the dialogue before the class aloud.


- Ask Ss to give the answers to the given questions after reading the dialogue again.
- Call some Ss to write the answers on the BB.



- T and Ss correct and give the right answers:
Keys :


<i>a, Hoa is 13 years old.</i>


<i>b, She will be 14 on her next birthday.</i>
<i>c, Her birthday is on June eighth.</i>
<i>d, Hoa lives with her uncke and aunt.</i>


<i>e, Hoa is worried because she does not have any friends.</i>


- Ss practice in groups to ask and answer their partner : <i>About you.</i>


- Call some Ss say some information about their friends with the model:
+ He/ She will be...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

- Give some remarks.


c, B5. Read the dialogue again. Then complete the form:


- Ss look at the Student Registration Form, T guides how to complete the form
- Ss pratice completing the form.


- T gives the full right information about Hoa .


<i>Name: Pham Thi Hoa.</i>
<i>Date of birth: June eighth.</i>


<i>Address: 12 Tran Hung Dao Street.</i>
<i>Telephone numbers: 8 262 019.</i>



- Ss prepare a card and write their personal information on the form.
- Ss compare with their friends.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the way of making a registration form.
-Repeat the months of the year.


- Remind Ss the preposition : <i><b>on. </b></i>


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Practice reading the dialogue , the months by heart.
- Do Ex2,3 in workbook.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


..$$$$$...


………


Preparing date: Sept....


Teaching date : Sept…




Period 12: Unit 2: Personal information

<b>.</b>



<b> Lesson 6 : B.My birth day (6,7,8*<sub>,9</sub>*<sub> ).</sub></b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To practice reading comprehension.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the dates of months and use them in the


structures: <i>My birthday is on ...</i>


<i>The party will be at ...</i>


<i>- To develop the main skills especially reading comprehension.</i>
<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exbook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<b>1. Class settlement :</b>


Attendance: 7A 7B 7C 7D


<b>2. Old lesson check:</b>


- S1 writes and reads the months of the year.


- S2,3 read B4 by heart and answer some questions.


- SS do exercise 2,3 in workbook, others remark and correct.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<i><b>A. Warm- up:</b></i>


- Play game: Lucky numbers:


<i>1. Where does Hoa live?</i>
<i>2. Lucky number.</i>


<i>3. How old is Hoa?</i>
<i>4. Which class is she in?</i>
<i>5. Lucky number.</i>


<i>6. Who does she live with?</i>
<i>7. When is Hoa s birthday?</i>’


<i>8. Lucky number.</i>
<i><b>B. Presentation:</b></i>


<b> B6. Read. Then complete the card:</b>
<i><b>*Pre- reading</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<i>1. What are they doing in the picture?</i>
<i>2. What is Lan doing?</i>


<i><b>*While- reading</b></i>


- Give guided questions:


<i>1. How old is Lan now?</i>
<i>2. Where does she live?</i>
<i>3. When is her birthday?</i>



<i>4. When will the party start and finish?</i>


- Ss read the passage silently and answer the given questions.
- Call some Ss to give the answers.


- T gives the right ones:


<i>1. She is 12.</i>


<i>2. She live at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street.</i>
<i>3. It is on May 25th<sub>.</sub></i>


<i>4. The party will start at five o clock in the evening and finish at nine.</i>’
- Call some Ss to read the passage aloud.


- T corrects the mistakes in pronouncing words.


<i><b>*Post- reading</b></i>


- Ask Ss to look at Lan’s invitation card and fill in the gaps with information from the
passage.


- Ss compare their answers with their partners’.
- Call some Ss to read their writing.


- Correct the mistakes.


<b> B7: Think and write:…</b>



- Ss read the questions and work in groups to discuss the possible answers.


- Note Ss the way to use the future simple tense with <i>Will</i>


- Call some groups to practice speaking aloud.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- T gives the form to write an invitation card:


<i><b>* Body of the letter</b></i>: I am having a birthday party on <i>Sunday, May 25th</i><sub>. The party </sub>


will be at my house at <i>24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street</i> from <i>5:00</i> to <i>9:00</i>.I hope you will come


and join the fun.


<i><b>* Complimentary close</b></i>: Love. <i><b>* Signature</b></i>: <i>Lan</i>
<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


<i><b> -</b></i> Do Ex 4,5 (workbook)


- Learn by heart B6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b> </b>


Preparing date: 27/9/09


Teaching date:

Period 13:



Unit 3: At home

<b>.</b>


<b> Lesson 1: A. What a lovely home ! (1-2).</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To practice exclaimative sentences .
- To use the structure: It has + N.


- To develop skills especially reading comprehension.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to make exclamations with: What + N !


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exercise book, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<b> 1. Class Organization:</b>


<i>- Attendance: 7A</i> 7B


<i><b>2.Oral test:</b></i>


- Choose ss to read B6 by heart and answer the questions
- Do exercise 4,5


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Play game: Hang man:



_ _ _ _ _ House _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Living room


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


<b>A1. Listen. Then practise with a partner.</b>


* Pre- listening


- Give some guided question:


1, How many rooms are there in your house?
2, What are they?


3, What are there in each room?
- T elicits some new words from ss


<i>awful: tåi tƯ.</i> <i>comfortable: tho¶i mái, dễ chịu,</i>


<i>tub: bn tm</i> <i>amazing: ỏng ngc nhiờn.</i>


<i>shower: vũi tắm hoa sen.</i> <i>dryer: máy sấy.</i>
<i>sink: bồn rửa bát.</i> <i>refrigerator: tủ lạnh.</i>
<i>convenient: tiện lợi</i> <i>modern: hiện đại.</i>


- T reads the words all aloud.


- Help Ss read after, then call some Ss to read aloud.
* While- listening


- Ask Ss to look at the picture at P.29.



- Ss call out the names of the things in each room both in English and Vietnamese.
- T plays tape and asks Ss to listen the dialgue once.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

- The exclamation with the form: What + N 


+ Complaints: Eg: What an awful day 


+ Compliments: E.g: What a bright room 


Form: <i><b>What + a/ an +adj + singular N </b></i>


<i><b> What + adj + plural N </b></i>


- Would you like + to V...?: Mét lêi mêi lÞch sù.
- to be at work: đang làm việc.


- to go shopping/ to shop/ do shopping: đi mua sắm.
- Ss listen the dialogue again, then practice reading in pairs.
- Call some pairs to read the dialogue aloud.


- Get Ss answer the questions, then compare their answer with their partners.
- Ask some Ss to write the answers on the BB while the rest do it orally.
- Give the right answers:


<i>a) The living room, Hoa s bedroom and the kitchen.</i>’


<i>b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors: pink and white.</i>
<i>c) A sink, a tub and a shower.</i>



<i>d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dishwasher and an alectric stove.</i>


- Ss copy the answers into their notebook.
* Post- listening


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to asnwer the part : About you.
- Encourage Ss to use as much nouns as possible


<b>A2. Write exclamations:</b>


*. Pre- writing:


- Call some Ss to present the way to write an exclamative sentence.
- Present the form again:


Form : <i><b>What + a/ an +adj + singular N </b></i>


<i><b> What + adj + plural N </b></i>


- Give some examples to make clear:


<i>What a hot day </i>
<i>What nice clothes </i>


*. While- writing:


- Ask Ss to practice writing the part (a) to write complaints with given cues.
- Call some Ss to write them on the BB while the others do orally.


- T corrects and give the right answers:



<i>1, What an awful restaurant </i>
<i>2, What a wet day </i>


<i>3, What a boring party </i>
<i>4, What a bad movie </i>
<i>*. Post- writing:</i>


- Ss go on practicing with part (b) both by writing and speaking.
- T gives the answers:


<i>1, What a great party </i>
<i>2, What a bright room </i>


<i>3, What an interesting movie </i>
<i>4, What a lovely house </i>


<i>5, What a delicious dinner </i>
<i>6, What a beutiful day </i>


- Ss copy the answers into their notebook


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the exclamations and the nouns to show things.
- Describe the things in the classroom.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Learn by heart the vocab.


- Practice reading the dialogue.
- Do the Ex1,2 in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson: A3,4.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<i><b>---Preparing date: 28/9/09 </b></i>

Period 14 : Unit 3: At home

<i><b>.</b></i>
<b>T: Lesson 2: A3. </b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To practice the exclamations and using structures with : Is there…. ? Are there …..?


After the lesson Ss can use the exclamations and structures above .
- To develop the skills especially speaking and writing


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, workbook, tape and cassett.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. ClassOrganization. </b></i>


-Attendance : ...7A:... ...7B:...


<i><b> 2Oral test. </b></i>


- S1 & S2 : Read the dialogue, then answer T'questions.


- S3 & S4: Write some new words then read and make sentences
- Others do exs on the BB, the last observe, remark and correct.



<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Play game: Jumbled words.


luawf: <i>awful.</i> leocmorfat: <i>comfortable.</i> yevlol: <i>lovely.</i>


hgrbit: <i>bright</i> eicn: <i>nice.</i> domren: <i>modern</i>. mignaaz: <i>amazing.</i>


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


<b>A3.Look at the picture.Then practice with a partner.</b>
<i><b> a, Point and say:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book and think of the names of the things.


- Remind Ss the way to use : There is……… / There are ...


- Ss look at the words box to remember the vocab.
- Ask Ss to call out the names of things in the picture.


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs, then some pairs practice before the class.
- T helps if necessary.


<b> b,Ask and answer:</b>


- T asks Ss to recall some prepositions of place.


- Ss revise those prepositions, T writes them on the BB:



in on under next to near behind ...


- Give some examples to make clear.


<i>There is a blackboard in the classroom.</i>
<i>There are some ceiling fans on the ceiling.</i>


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the position of the given things in the box.
- Get Ss to practice in pairs, Call some pairs to practice aloud.


<b>A4. Play with words: </b>


- T plays tape , Ss listen then repeat sentence by sentence.


- T notes the pronunciation, gives some new words if necessary :


eg :+ delicious : ngon + smell : Mïi


+ forget : quên + cares : quan tâm, chú ý + safe : An toµn


- Ss are supposed to read aloud , others listen and correct .
- Ask Ss to make sentences with exclemation.


- Practice describing the position of the things.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss of the exclamations and make sentences .
- Describe the position of the things in the classroom.



<i><b> 5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review the use of the exclamation.
- Do Ex3,4 in workbook.


- Prepare the next lesson: B1,2.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Preparing date: 2/10/09

Period 15 : Unit 3: At home

<b>.</b>
<b>T: Lesson 3: B1-2</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on comprehension listening.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about one’s job with the structures:


<b>What + do / does + S + do? or</b> <b>What + do / does + S + work ?</b>


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook , exercise book, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


-Attendance : ...7A:………...7B:...


<i><b> 2Oral test:</b></i>



- S1 & S2 : Describe the position of the things in the classroom.
- S3 & S4: Write 5 exclamtive sentences on the BB


- Ss do ex 3,4 on the BB , others observe then remark .


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Chatting about the jobs of Ss’parents.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>


* Pre- listening:


- Ss are supposed to answer the questions:


<i>a, Who are they in the picture?</i>
<i>b, What are they doing?</i>


<i>c, What are their jobs?</i>


<i>d, What do farmers do everyday?</i>
<i>e, Where do they work?</i>


<i>f, Do they have to work hard?</i>


- T elisits new words from Ss : + grow : trång + raise : chăn nuôi + cattle : gia sóc


* While- listening:


- Play the tape once, Ss listen.


- Give the structures to ask one’s job then ask Ss to give examples.


<i><b>What do / does + S + do?</b></i>
<i><b>S + be + a / an + name of jobs.</b></i>
<i> eg: What does your father do?</i>


<i>He is a farmer.</i>


- Teach some new words.


<i>Farm: trang trại, cánh đồng.</i> <i>Countryside: đồng quê.</i>
<i>Grow vegetables: trồng rau.</i> <i>raise cattle: nuôi gia súc.</i>
<i>housework: công việc nhà.</i>


- Ss listen once again.


- Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs, then call some pairs perform.
- Note the pronunciation.


* Post- listening:


- Ask Ss to practice answering the questions in pairs, one asks another answers.
- Call some pairs to give the answers aloud.


- T and others correct and write the answers on the BB.



<i>* Now answer :</i>


<i>a, He s a farmer.</i>’


<i>b, He works on his farm.</i>
<i>c, She is a housewife.</i>


<i>d, She does housework and she helps on the farm.</i>
<i>e, Yes, they are.</i>


<i>f, She is 8.</i>


- Ss copy into their notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

* Pre- reading:


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess the job of each person.
- Ss work in groups to discuss about each job’s characteristics.
- Elicit the new words from Ss :


+ take care of : chăm sóc
+ sick : èm


+ Primary school : trêng cÊp 1
+ journalist : nhà báo
- Ss repeat after T then call some ss read.
* While- reading:


- Ss read the text silently.



- Call some Ss to read the text aloud.


- Get Ss to answer the given questions in pairs.
- Call some pairs to answer the questions aloud.
- T corrects and gives the right ones:


a, <i>Her father is a doctor.</i>
<i> He works in a hospital.</i>


b, <i>Her mother is a teacher.</i>


<i> She teaches in a primary school.</i>


c, <i>Her brother is a jounalist.</i>


<i> He writes for a Ha Noi newspaper</i>.
- Ss copy the answers.


* Post- reading:


- Ss do the matching in B3 in groups.
- Call some Ss to give the answers.


- T corrects:<i>A farmer works on a farm.</i>


<i>A doctor takes care of sick people.</i>
<i>A jounalist writes for newspaper.</i>
<i>A teacher teaches in a school. </i>
<i><b> 4. Consolidation:</b></i>



- Remind Ss the way to ask one’s jobs.
-Practice speaking about their parents 'job.


<i><b> 5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review the key points.
- Do the Ex1 in workbook.


- Learn new words and B1 by heart.
- Prepare for the new lesson B3.4.


______________________________________________________________________


Preparing date: 2/10/09

Period 16 : Unit 3: At home

<b>.</b>


<b> T: Lesson 4 : B3-4</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on comprehension listening.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to describe some typical jobs.
- Develop the main skills especially listening.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook , exercise book, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>



Attendance: ...7A………7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- S1 & S2 : Each S writes 5 new words, read and make egs with one of those.
- S3 & S4: Read the dialogue then answer T ' questions.


- Others do ex1 on the BB , the last remark and correct.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>


A. Warm- up:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

grow vegetables


B. Presentation:


<b> B3.Match these halfs-sentesces. </b>


-T asks Ss to look at P at page35 then guess the jobs of each.


- Ss are supposed to pratice speaking about the characteristics of the job
- T elicits new words from Ss. Egs :


+ dentist: B.s nha khoa
+writer : Nhµ văn
+ painter: Họa sĩ


- Call some ss match, others observe and remark, correct the mistakes if necessary.
- T asks Ss to give the right answers.



<i>A farmer works on a farm.</i>


<i>A doctor takes care of sick people.</i>
<i>A jounalist writes for newspaper.</i>
<i>A teacher teaches in a school. </i>
<i><b>B4. Listen:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to prepare some information cards:


Name: ...
Age: ...
Job: ...
Place of work: ...
...
- Ss listen through the tapescript.


- Ss listen twice again to fill in the form.
- Call some Ss to give the answers.


- Play tape the last time , Ss check and remark.
- Give feedback, then give the keys:


i, Tom-26-teacher- at a high school.
ii, Susan-19-juornalist-for a magazine.
iii,Bill-20-nurse-in a hospital


<b> 4. Consolidation:</b>


- Remind Ss of some jobs and their characteristics.


- Repeat the job vocabulary.


<b> 5. Homework:</b>


- Rewrite the jobs and their characteristics.
- Do exercise 2 in workbook.


- Prepare for the next lesson B5.6.


Preparing date :6/10/09

Period 17: Unit 3 : At home

<b>.</b>


<b> T: Lesson 5: B5</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on the comparative and the superlative.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the comparative and the superlative correctly.
- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook ,exercicebook, tape and cassette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


-Attendance : ...7A:……… ………7B


<i><b> 2Oral test:</b></i>



- S1: Write some jobs and words concerning to those jobs. .


- S2: Go to the BB and talk about the jobs of their family members.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Others do ex2 in workbook, others observe ,remark and correct.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>


A. Warm- up:


<i><b> Play game: Lucky number.</b></i>


1.You go to this person when have toothache.( Dentist)
2. Lucky number.


3. This person writes for a newspaper or a magazine.(Writer)
4. This person works in the library.( Librarian)


5. Lucky number.


6. This person cuts men' hair.( Barber)


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<i><b>B5: Listen and read:</b></i>


- Give some eliciting questions:


<i>a, Do you live in a house or an apartment?</i>
<i>b, Which is more comfortable?</i>



- T presents the tasks.


- Play the tape for Ss to listen through once.


- T revises the comparative and the superlative of adjectives.
- Give form:


A. The comparative:
+ Short adjectives:


S1 + be + short adj-er + than + S2.
+ Long adjectives:


S1 + be + more + long adj + than + S2.
B. The superlative:


<i>+ Short adjectives:</i>


<i><b>S + be + the + short adj-est.</b></i>
<i>+ Long adjectives:</i>


<i><b>S + be + the most + long adj.</b></i>


* Notes: good - better - the best.


bad - worse - the worst.
- Give examples to each kind.


- T plays the tape twice and ask Ss to repeat the dialogue silently.


- Ask Ss to answer the given questions in pairs.


- Call some Ss to write them on the BB while others do orally.
- T corrects and gives the right ones.


<i><b>Answer:</b></i>


<i>a, The one at No 27 is.</i>
<i>b, The one at the No 79 is.</i>
<i>c, The one at the No 79 is.</i>


<i>d, The one at the No 27 is. It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a </i>
<i>kitchen.</i>


- Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs.
- Call some pairs to read aloud.


- Elicit some new words :
+ apartment = flat
+ empty: trống rỗng
+ really? thËt vËy sao ?
+ of course: tÊt nhiªn


+ furnishhed:trang trÝ néi thÊt
+ suitable:phï hỵp


+ modern><old


B6.Write. …….Complete the letter using these words.



- Ss are supposed to look at the part and answer T' questions:
+ What do you see in this part ?(letter)


+ Why do you know it is the letter ? ( dates, dear, love.)
-T introduces it 's a common structure used in letter.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- Ss do then compare their keys with their partner.


- Call some ss read the answers before the class, others listen and correct if necessary.
- T gives the correct answers , Ss copy in their notes.


<i>Keys : Beautiful, expensive, cheapest, small, big, best.</i>


- T calls ss read the complete letter then explains structure :
+ rather + adj : khá ,tốt


+ luckily : may mắn thay


<i><b> 4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Call some Ss to describe the three rooms using comparative and superlative.
- Repeat the main knowlege


<i><b> 5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review the comparative and the superlative.
- Do the Ex2,3 in workbook.


- Prepare the next lesson: Language focus.



Preparing date :

Period 18 : Language focus 1

<b>.</b>


<b> T: </b> <b> </b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on all grammar points in three Units..


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with the learnt grammar points correctly.
- Develop the main skills espcially speaking and writing.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook , exercise book extra board.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B………..


<i><b> 2Oral test:</b></i>


- S1: Write 5 comparative sentences.
- S2: Write 5 superlative sentences.


- Others do ex2,3 on the board, then remark and correct.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: Give the comparative form of these following adjs:</b>



- good - bad - difficult - small - expensive - cheap


- strong - interesting - lucky - nice - short - big...


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<i><b>I. Theory :</b></i>


- Ss revise some key grammar points from Unit 1 to Unit 3.


- T helps Ss practice them both by speaking aloud and writing them on the BB.
- T gives the right answers and asks Ss to copy them into their notebook.


1. Present simple tense:


*.Form: (+) S + V(s,es)…


(-) S +do/does +not + V…


(?) Do/does + S + V…?


*. Example:


She does the housework every night.


<i>*. Keys : a) is / lives / are / goes.</i>
<i>b) are / eat / rides / catch.</i>


2. Future simple tense:



*. Form: (+) S+ Will + V…


(-) S + Will/shall + not + V…


(?) Will/Shall + S + V…?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

I will be 30 on my next birthday.


She will do her homework tomorrow evening.


<i>*. Keys:</i> <i>He will do his homework, but he won t tidy the yard.</i>’


<i>He will see a movie, but he won t watch TV.</i>’


<i>He will write to his grandmother, but he won t meet Minh.</i>’
3. Ordinal numbers:


<i>First; Fourth; Fifth; Sixth; third; second; seventh.</i>


4. Prepositions:


<i>a, It s under the table.</i>’ <i>b, It s in front of the chair.</i>’


<i>c, It s behind the TV</i>’ <i>d, It s next to the bookcase.</i>’


<i>e, It s on the couch.</i>’
5. Adjectives:


<i>a, A is a cheap toy; - And B is cheaper; - But C is the cheapest.</i>



<i>b, A is an expensive dress; - And B is more expensive; - But C is the most </i>
<i>expensive. </i>


<i>c, A is a good student; - And B is better; - But C is the best </i>
<i>d, A is a strong; - And B is stronger; - But C is the strongest </i>


6. Occupations:


<i>a, He is a fireman.</i> <i>c, She is a teacher.</i>
<i>b, She is a doctor.</i> <i>d, He is a farmer.</i>


7. Practice the structure with : Is there…?, Are there…?


8. Revise W-H questions : Who , what ,where, which ,why ,how…


- Ss practice based on the book.


<i><b>II. Open practice:</b></i>


- Ss practice writing a passage using all the grammar points after T' control.
- T helps if necessary


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss some key points.


- Ss are supposed to give some examples.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>



- Review the grammar points.
- Do the Ex in workbook.


- Prepare for the written test.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b> </b> ( Time limited: 45 minutes)
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To check up Ss’understanding through unit 1 to unit 3.
- To find out the weak points to help ss pass over.


- To develop presenting skills.


- To encourage ss to study more seriously & effectively.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>
<i><b>A. Questions :</b></i>


<i><b>I. Odd one out:</b></i>


<i>1 a. great</i> <i>b. beautiful </i> <i>c. teacher</i> <i>d. mean.</i>
<i>2 a. stove</i> <i>b. moment</i> <i>c. sometime</i> <i>d. close.</i>


<i>3 a. horrible</i> <i>b. hour</i> <i>c. house</i> <i>d. here.</i>


<i>4 a. sunny</i> <i>b. under</i> <i>c. student</i> <i>d. lunch.</i>


<i>5 a. wet</i> <i>b. better</i> <i>c. pretty</i> <i>d. rest.</i>


<i><b>II. Read. Then answer the questions :</b></i>



It's very hot in summer and in the evenings nobody likes staying at home. People walk
in the streets or sit in the open. We have a special summer cinema and myfriends and I
often go there. There are tall trees all around and it's very cool. Sometimes the films are
not very good, but we don't mind.


<i>6, Is the weather hot in summer ?</i>


<i>=> ……….</i>


<i>7, Who likes staying at home in the evenings?</i>
<i>=> ………</i>
<i>8, Where do your friends and you often go ?</i>
<i>=> ………</i>
<i>9, Is it warm or cool?</i>


<i>=> ……….</i>


<i>10, Do you always see good films?</i>


<i>=> ………. </i>


<i><b>III. Write the sentences based on the given cues:</b></i>
<i>11, What / nice/ shirt.</i>


<i>=>………</i>
<i>12, How/interesting/Viet Nam people.</i>


<i>=>………..</i>



<i>13, Would/ like/swim/summer.</i>


<i>=>………</i>


<i>14, John/always/feel/happy/when/he come/home.</i>
<i>=>………</i>
<i>15, Theirhouse/most/wonderful/theirstreet.</i>


<i>=>……….</i>


<i><b>IV. Choose the best answers:</b></i>


<i>16, I ……. to a party tomorrow night. Would you like to come?</i>


<i>A. am going</i> <i>B. will go</i> <i>C. go</i>


<i>17, Hoa is very………… about her study at the new school.</i>


<i>A. worry</i> <i>B. worried</i> <i>C. worrying</i>


<i>18, How old will you be……. the next birthday?</i>


<i>A. at</i> <i>B. on</i> <i>C. in</i>


<i>19, Thursday is……….. day of the week.</i>


<i>A. the five</i> <i>B. the fiveth</i> <i>C. the fifth</i>


<i>20, That movie is ……… than this one.</i>



<i>A. more interesting</i> <i>B. interestinger</i> <i>C. interesting</i>
<i>21, What is the ……. river in Viet Nam?</i>


<i>A. tallest</i> <i>B. largest</i> <i>C. highest</i>


<i>22, July is ……….. than August.</i>


<i>A. hot</i> <i>B. hoter</i> <i>C. hotter</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<i>A. is - do</i> <i>B. do - do</i> <i>C. is - doing</i>
<i>27, I'd like ………… your group.</i>


<i>A. join</i> <i>B to join</i> <i>C. joining</i>


<i>28, She ……… piano three times a day.</i>


<i>A. play</i> <i>B. playing</i> <i>C. plays</i>


<i>29, This flat has two bedrooms and they are………..</i>


<i>A. furnish</i> <i>B. furnished</i> <i>C. furnishing</i>


<i>30, This food is good …. you.</i>


<i>A. for</i> <i>B. on</i> <i>C. at</i>


<i>31, She is not at home now. She is ………….work.</i>


<i>A. out</i> <i>B.in</i> <i>C. at</i>



<i>32, I like English and Literature. They are my……….subjects.</i>


<i>A. favor</i> <i>B. favorite</i> <i>C. favoreti</i>


<i>33, What ……..strong tea !</i>


<i>A.a</i> <i>B. an</i> <i>C. o</i>


<i>34, Ha is ………… fatter than Huyen.</i>


<i>A.much</i> <i>B.more</i> <i>C. many</i>


<i>35, How carefully he ………….. !</i>


<i>A. drive </i> <i>B. drives</i> <i>C. is driving </i>


<i><b>V. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the blank. </b></i>


<i>36. Mr Thanh is a doctor. He (work)...in a hospital in the city. Everyday he</i>
<i>(go)...to work by bus.</i>


<i>37. Her mother (cook)...dinner now.</i>
<i>38. We(visit)...the city next week.</i>


<i>39. It ( rain) ………. as soon as the rain (stop) …………. I'll walk home.</i>


<i>40. I need (call) …………my parents today and ( tell) ……….. them about my new flat.</i>
<i><b>B. Keys and marks:</b></i>


<b>I. Odd …. ( 0,4 x 5 = 2 points )</b>



1. b 2. c 3. b 4. c 5. c


<b>II. Read… ( 0,4 x 5 = 2 points )</b>


6. Yes, it is.


7. Nobody ( likes staying at home in the evenings)


8. Myfriends and I often go to the special summer cinema.
9. It is cool.


10. No. Sometimes the films are not very good.


<b>III. Use…. ( 0,4 x 5 = 2 points)</b>


11. What a nice shirt!


12. What/How friendly Vietnamese people!
13. Would you like to swim in the summer?


14. John always feels happy when he comes home.
15. That apartment is the most wonderful on their street.


<b>IV. Choose…( 0,1 x 20 = 2 points)</b>


16. B 17. C 18. B 19. C 20.A 21.B 22.C 23. than 24. lot 25. it 27.B 28. C 29. B
30. A 31.C 32. B 33. C 34. A 35. B


<b>V. Give… ( 0,4 x 5 =2 points)</b>



36. works - goes 37. is cooking 38. will visit 39. is raining - stops


40. to call - tell


<b>III. Testing process:</b>
<b>1. Class Organization:</b>


Attendance:…….7A... 7B...


<b>2.Deliver the test copies:</b>


- T gives ss the copys without explaining anything.
- Ss do the tests seriously and independently.


<b>3. Collect the tests and remark the period.</b>


-Ss hand out their tests to the T.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Prepare the next lesson.


- T helps ss read new words unit 4.


Preparing date :

Period 20: Unit 4: At school

<b>.</b>


<b>T: Lesson 1: A.Schedules(1,2).</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice asking and answering about the time.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to tell the time and the time of the subjects.
- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape and cassette , flatcards of time.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:…...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


<i><b> - Doing with the new lesson.</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Introduce the new lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
A1. Listen and repeat:


- Give some guided questions:
Eg:What time is it now?



What time do you go to school?
- T introduces the lesson.


- T revises the way to ask about the time and the way to give the answers.


- T reminds Ss the way to use “ half” instead of <i>thirty</i> and “ a quarter” for <i>fifteen</i>


- T plays the tape for Ss to listen through once.


- Play the tape again and pause at each sentence, then ask Ss to repeat.
- Call some Ss to read the given time in the textbook.


A2. Answer about you:


- T makes clear the way to practice.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.


- Call some Ss to practice orally.
- Give some remarks on Ss’ practice.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the way to tell the time and the subjects.
- Ask ss to pratice about their own subjects and its time.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Write the names of the subjects in English.
- Do exercise 1 in the workbook.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

______________________________________________________________________
__


Preparing date:

Period 21 : Unit 4: At school

<b>.</b>


T: <b> Lesson 2: A. Schedules (3,4).</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on the present progressive tense.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the present progressive tense correctly.
- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exercise book, tape and cassette .


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization;</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A…… ………. .7B:………..


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Ss do ex1 on the board.
- Others observe then remark.


<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>



- T calls ss write the subjects on the board.


- Others do ex1 on the BB, the rest observe and remark.


<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


English Math


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
A3. Listen and write:


- T introduces the subjects.


Eg: school meeting: chào cờ class meeting: sinh hoạt


extra curriculum activivies : h®ngll elective subject: m«n tù chän


- Make clear the task.


- Play the tape for Ss to listen through.


- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with the time they’ve just heard.
- Call some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.


- T gives the right ones.


<b>Friday</b>


7.00 7.50 8.40 9.40 10.30



English Geography Music Physics History


<b>Saturday</b>


1.00 2.40 3.40 4.30


Physical Education Math English Physics


- Ss copy the table.


<b>A4. Ask and answer:</b>


- Ss look at the pictures on P.43 and name the subjects in the pictures.
- Ss practice asking and answering.


Example exchange:



<i>- What is Lan studying?</i>
<i>She is studying Physics.</i>


<i>- What time does Lan have her Physics class?</i>
<i>She has her physics class at 8.40.</i>


- Ss practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

- Call some pairs to practice aloud.
- Give some remarks.


- Write their schedule in their exercise book.



<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the simple present and present progressive tense.
- Make some sentences.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Write a schedule of their own.
- Do exercise 2,3 in the workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


Preparing date:

Period 22 . Unit 4: At school

<b>.</b>


T: Lesson 3: A.Schedules (5,6,).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Practice the structure : “S + be + different from + O” to distinguish the difference


between two things, two people. When/what time …?


- After the lesson, Ss know the difference between American education and Vietnamese
one..


- To develop themain skills especially listening and speaking.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Teaching plan, textbook, workbook, tape and cassette.



<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization;</b></i>


- Attendance : …...7A , 7B


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- One writes their timetable on the board.


- Others do ex2,3 on the board, the rest remarks.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Say something about Vietnamese education.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<b>A5. Listen and read.</b>


- T asks ss some eliciting questions,ss listen then answer the questions:
Eg: Do you know/ have your daily and weekly schedule ?
Do you usually follow the schudule ?


- T asks ss to look at the A5 on the page 44 and listen to the dalogue between Hoa and
Thu, then T plays tape ss listen once.


- T elicits some main vocab from ss then explains if necessary.



a, asking about the time with "when": When / What time+ do/does + S + V …?


Eg: When do you have English ?
b, asking about the favorite subject :


Eg: What is one'favorite subject ?


c,''Too'' standing at the end of the sentence to express the affirmative agreement.
Eg: I love swimming. She loves swimming,too.
d, ''on'' going with the dates of week: on Sunday, On Monday.


- T plays tape the second ss listen then asks them to practice in pairs, some pairs read
before the classroom.


- T guides ss write their own schedule with the time exactly.


- After writing their schedule, ss practice asking and answering the questions above in
pairs then ask some pairs practice before the classroom.


- T notes : the importance of schudule .


<b>A6.Read.</b>


<b> * Pre- reading:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<i>What do you think about USA?</i>
<i>What do you know about USA?</i>


- Remind Ss the full form of USA: the United States of American.
- T explains the tasks.



<b> * While- reading:</b>


- Ss listen the text reading by excelant student or T.
- T explains some new words or structures:


<i>+a 20- minute break</i> <i>+school uniform:</i> <i>+school cafeteria</i>
<i>+snacks +(un)popular</i> <i>+after school activities</i>


- Ss practice reading the text aloud.


- Ss practice the Ex T / F in the text book in group.
- Call some Ss to give their answers.


- T corrects and gives the right ones:


<i>a) T</i> <i>d) T </i> <i>b) F</i> <i>e) F</i> <i> c) F</i> <i>f) F</i>


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>
<b> * Post- reading:</b>


- Ss discuss to find out the differences between Vietnamese and American Education in
groups.


- Call one in each group to present in front of the class, others remark.
- Sum up all key points.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Learn by heart A5 and newwords.


- Do the Ex4 in workbook.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


Preparing date : ………


T:




Period 23 : Test correction.


<b>I, Objectives :</b>


- To help Ss know how much knowlegue they have gained after the test.
- To help Ss overcome the bad points.


- To correct the mistakes and help them understand deeply the knowlegue test.


<b>II, Preperation :</b>


- Textbook, the marked tests.


<b>III, Teaching procedures :</b>
<b> 1. Class Organization:</b>


Attendence:7A……….7B………


<b> 2.Oral test:</b>


Something about the tests



<b> 3. New lesson:</b>
<b>A.Warm-up:</b>


Play game :Lucky numbers getting from the tests.


<b>B. Presentation :</b>


<i>1,Repeat the tenses:</i>


*. The present tense.


*. The present progressive tense.
*. The future tense.


*. The others.


<i>2,Remark the tests'result:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

b, good marks:
c, fair marks:
d, bad marks:


<i>3,The reasons :</i>


- Don't learn new works and structures.
- Don't read the tests deeply and carefully.
- Write carelessly, fasle dictation.


- Look at others' lesson.



<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


- Repeat the main grammars.
- Give some example.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


- Revise the learnt units.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


..****** ..


……… ………


Preparing date:

Period 24 : Unit 4: At school

<b>.</b>


T: Lesson 4: B. The library (1,2).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to describe a library by using some demonstratives :
''this, that, these, those'' and the prepositions of places , structures with "has/have".
- Ss practice using some popular orders in the library eg:


? Where can I find + name of the books, please?
? Do you have +name of the books +here?
- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



- Textbook, exercise book, tape and cassette .


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendence: 7A...7b...


<i><b> 2.Oral test: </b></i>


<i><b>- something about American and Vietnam education.</b></i>
<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up:</b> behind


On the left of


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<i>B1. Listen and read. </i>
<b>* Pre- reading:</b>


- Ss look at the picture and asnwer the questions:


<i>What is it in the picture ?</i>
<i>Where do you usually see it ?</i>
<i>Does your school have a library ?</i>


<i>What do you usually do when you go to the library ?</i>
<i>Who usually helps you find the books in the library ?</i>



- T explains the order the lesson then asks Ss to listen to the tape.
- T elicits and explains some new words from ss:


New words:


<i>rack</i> <i> science books</i>
<i>Literature in Vietnamese</i> <i>novel</i>


<i>reader</i> <i>reference books</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<i> at the back of</i> <i>follow</i>


- Ss read the new words aloud then ask some ss to read .


<b> * While- reading:</b>


- Ss listen to the tape once again, then practice reading in pairs then ask ss to read the
questions below.


- Call some pairs to practice reading aloud.


- Ss read the dialogue again to answer the questions given in the textbook.
- Call some Ss to compare their answer with others then give the answers.
- T corrects and gives the right ones:


<i>a, They are on the racks ( near the science books )</i>
<i>b, They are on the racks ( near the history books )</i>
<i>c, The Math and science books are.</i>



<i>d, The History and Geography books, dictonaries and Literature in Vietnamese </i>
<i>are.</i>


<i>e, They are at the back of the library.</i>
<i>f, It opens at 7 a.m.</i>


<i>g, It closes at 4.30.</i>


- Ss copy the answers.


<b>* Post- reading:</b>


- Ss practice reading the dialogue again.


- Remind Ss the names of the books in library.


<i>A2. Listen . Then practice with a partner.</i>


- T sets the situation.


- Play the tape once for Ss to practice listening.
- Explain some structures used in this dialogue.


<i>Where can I find..., please?</i>
<i>Do you have ... here? </i>


- Play the tape once again, then ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs.
- Call some pairs to read the dialogue aloud .


- Ask ss to practice asking and answeringthe questions base on A1.



<b>4. Consolidation :</b> Duyet giao trong an tuan


- Repeat some name of books. Ngay… …./ ./2008


- Repeat the structures.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex1,2 in workbook. Nguyen Hien.


- Learn new words and A2 by heart.
- Prepare the next lesson


______________________________________________________________________


Preparing date:

Period 25: Unit 4: At school

<b>.</b>


T: Lesson 5: B.The library(3,4).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Practice on library vocabulary and know more about the largest library in the world.
- After the lesson, Ss will be able to how to set the library by using some verbs egs :


put, keep on, go on and some preps egs : on, behind, next to, in….


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



- Textbook, work book, tape and cassette .


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class Organization:</b></i>


-Attendence:...7A:...,……….7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- write new words on the BB.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

- do ex2 in wordbook, remark and correct.


<i><b> 3. New lesson :</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up:</b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b> B3: Listen.Where are they ?</b>


- Ss look at the room and guess the position of the racks and shelves of books in the
library in groups.


- Write Ss’ guessing on the board.
- Play the tape for Ss to practice.


- Play the tape twice, then ask Ss to compare their answers with their guessing.


- Call some Ss to give their answers, others observe and remark.


- Play the tape for the last time , Ss check their answers.
- T gives the right ones:


<i>1: Study area.</i> <i>4 + 5: Newspapers and Magazines</i>
<i>2: Science + Math</i> <i>6 + 7: English</i>


<i>3: Geography</i> <i>8: Librarian s desk.</i>’
- Ss copy the right answers.


- Ask ss to present the position of books and magarines base on the picture.


<b>B4. Read . Then answer.</b>


* Pre- reading:


- Ss look at the pictures and answer the guided questions:
Do you know this building ?


Which building is it ?


Do you know which the largest library in the world is ?
* While- reading:


- Ask Ss to read the text silently.


- Ask Ss to answer the given questions in the textbook.


- Call some Ss to give their own answers on the board, others observe and remark.


- T give the right ones:


<i>a. It is in Washington D.C, the capital of the USA.</i>
<i>b. It has over 100 million books.</i>


<i>c. It has 1.000 km of shelves.</i>
<i>d. Over 5.000 people work there.</i>


<i>e. Because it receives copies of all American books.</i>


- Call some Ss to read the text again.


- Elicit and explain some new words, copy in their notes:


Congress capital receive


Contain employee>< employer.


- Read aloud the new words, translate the text if necessary.


- Play tape again, stop at the difficult sentences to explain or give the newwords .


Ex: assignment= homework.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Sum up the key points.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>



- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


<i><b>______________________________________________________________________ </b></i>


Preparedate:

Unit 5: Work and play.



<b> T: Period 26: Lesson 1: A1.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on listening .


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to describe work of a S with the present simple tense.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, Cassette and tape .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

-Attendance : ...7A:...7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: Chatting:</b>


 How many days a week do you go to school ?



 What time do you go to school ?


 What time do classes begin ?


 How many subjects do you study ?


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
* Pre - reading:
- Explain the task.


- Explain some new words:


Computer Science be interested in map


Difficult do experiments


* While - reading:


- Ss listen to the tape and practice reading along.
- Ss practice reading silently.


- Call some Ss to read the text aloud.


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about Mai in pairs.


Example Exchange:



S1: What does Mai study in her Geography class ?



S2: She studies maps and learns about different countries ?


- Call some pairs to practice aloud in front of the class.
- Give some remarks on their practice.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


* Post - reading:


- Ss practice further with these given questions:


What school does Mai go to ?


What grade is Mai in ?


How many days a week does Mai go to school ?


What time do classes begin ?


What time do they finish ?


What does Mai think about Geography ?


What is her lesson today ?


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review the key points and prepare the next lesson


______________________________________________________________________.



Preparedate:

Unit 5: Work and play.



<b>T: Period 27: Lesson 2: A2.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on reading comprehension. .


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to describe work of a S with the present simple tense.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, Cassette and tape .


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: Network:</b>


Math English


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
* Pre - reading:



- Give guided questions:


 What is Ba doing in picture 1 ?


 What is Ba doing in picture 2 ?


- Ss guess what they are going to do.
* While - reading:


- Ss read through the text and find out the new words
- T explains some new words:


enjoy electronics household appliances


fix light washing machine


refigerator to be good at drawing artist


- Ss read the text carefully, then answer the given questions in texbook.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.


- Call some pairs to practice aloud.
- Give the right answers:


a. Ba likes Electronics best.


b. Yes, he does. He enjoys school very much.
c. He learn to repair household appliances.
d. He will be able to fix his own appliances.


f. Yes, he is. His drawings are very good.


- Ss copy the right answers.


<i><b>4. Comprehension:</b></i>


* Post - reading:


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to answer the part: About you.
- Call some Ss to speak about themselves in front of the class.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Write about what they do often do in their free time.
- Prepare the next lesson.


____________________________________________________________________


Preparedate:

Unit 5: Work and play.



<b>T: Period 28: Lesson 3: A4- A5.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on listening for specific information.


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to improve their listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, Cassette and tape .



<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B...
Subjects


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>



<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
a. A3: Read:


- Give guided questions:


Do you like Math ?
Is it difficult or easy ?


- Explain some new words:


right >< wrong price cost problem erase



- Ask Ss to read the text silently, then answer the given questions.
- Ask Ss to compare their answers with the others’.


- Call some Ss to give their own answers.
- Give the right ones.


b. A4:


* Pre - listening:


- Ss look at the pictures and answer the guided questions:


What are the pictures about ?


What school subjects do you like best ?


Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa have on Saturday ?


* While - reading:


- Play the tape twice, then get Ss to give the answers.
- Play the tape for the last time.


- Ss compare their answers with their partners’.
- Call some Ss to give their own answers.


- T plays the the last time and pauses at each sentence for Ss to check their answers.
- Give the right answers:


Ba: d, a, e.


Hoa: c, b, e.


A5 - Give guided questions:


 How many subjects do you study at school ?


 What do you study in each subject ?


 Which subjects do you like / dislike ? why ?


- Ss look at the text and scan read.
- Give guided questions:


What do you study in Literature / History ?


- Ss look at the part Now discuss with a partner.
- Explain some new words:


author paintings basketball games famous people
world events important day preposition temperature


- Ss do the tasks.
- Give feedback.


- Call some Ss to give the right answers.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the special words for each subject.



<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


Preparedate:

Unit 5: Work and play.



<b>T: Period 29: Lesson 4: B1- B2.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

- After the lesson, Ss will be able to speak and describe their activities in the break.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, Cassette and tape .


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.



<b>B. Presentation</b>:
a, B1: Listen and read:


- Ss look at the pictures and answer:


Where are the children ?
What are they doing ?


When do they usually do these games ?


- Play the tape for the first time, then T explains some new words:


bell yard recess chat Blindman’s bluff


catch play marbles skip rope go indoors


- Ss listen to the tape again, then practice asking and answering.


Example Exchange:



S1. What is the boy doing ?


S2: He s playing catch’ .


S1: What are these chilrden doing ?


S2: They are talking.


- Ss revise the present progressive tense.


- Call some pairs to practice aloud.
- Give some remarks.


b. B2: Listen:


- Ss listen to the tasks they have to do.


- Ask Ss to read carefully the activities on the right.
- Play the tape for three times.


- Call some Ss to give their own answers.
- Call some Ss to give their answers aloud.


- Play the tape once again and pause at each improtant sentence for Ss to check.


- Give the right answers:Mai is playing catch.


Kien is blindman s bluff.’
Lan is skipping rope.
Ba is playing marbles.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


<i><b>Find someone who</b></i>


Name


Play marbles Nam - Minh...


Play blindman’s bluff


Skip rope


Chat
Eat
Drink


- Remind Ss the activities at recess.


- Remind Ss the Present Progressive Tense.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

_____________________________________________________________________


Preparedate:

Unit 5: Work and play.



<b> T: Period 30: Lesson 5: B3</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on reading comprehension.
- Further practice on communicating at recess.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B...




<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
a. B3: Read:


- Ss read through the text to get the main idies.
- Explain some new words:


energetic pen pal portable swap


junior high school senior high school take part in score goals


- Ss read the text again, then do the Ex in textbook.
- Ss compare their answers with their partners.
- Call some Ss to give their own answers.


- T gives the right ones: a) C b) A c) D d) D


- Call some Ss to read the text aloud.


- Ss list the activities that Ss in Vietnam and USA often do.



<i><b>b. B4: Take a survey:</b></i>


Name

<sub>Example Exchange:</sub>



Play marbles Nam - Minh... What do you usually do at recess?


Play blindman’s bluff Do you play soccer / skip rope ...?


Skip rope
Chat
Eat
Drink
Paly soccer


- Ss can go round to take the survey.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- List some activities that American Ss often do.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


_____________________________________________________________________


Preparedate:

Unit 6: After school.




<b> T: Period 31: Lesson 1: A1.</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

- After this lesson, Ss will be able to speak about their activities after school.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Atttendance : ...7A:...7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:
a. Listen:


- Ss answer the question:



What do you often do after school ?


- Ss look at the pictures and answer the question:


What are they doing in each picture ?
Playing vollayball


Doing homework
Meeting friends.


- Ss listen to the tape for the first time.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.


- Call some pairs to practice reading aloud in front of the class.
b. Answer:


- Ss read the text individually, then answer the questions given in textbook.
- Ss compare their answers with their friends.


- Call some Ss to give their answers.
- Give the right answers:


<i>a. She is doing her homework.</i>


<i>b. They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria.</i>
<i>c. He s in the music room.</i>’


<i>d. He s learning to play the guitar.</i>’


<i>e. He usually meets his friends.</i>


<i>f. She likes playing volleyball.</i>


- T explains some new words and phrases.


Relax invite


Let’s do...


Why don’t you + V...?


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the structures to give suggestion.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


______________________________________________________________________


Preparedate:

Unit 6: After school.



<b> T: Period 32: Lesson 2: A2.</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Practice asking and answering about the activities after school with some adverbs of
frequency.


- After this lesson, Ss will be able to use the adverbs of frequency to speak about their


activities after school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- Textbook.


<b>III. Teaching procedure:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class Organization:</b></i>


- Attendance : ...7A:...7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b> - Introduce the lesson.<b> B. Presentation</b>:


<b>A2: Label the pictures:</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures.
- Present the ways to practice.


- Ask Ss to name some activities in each picture.
- Check the right answers.


<i>Reading / studying in the library.</i>
<i>Swimming in the pool.</i>


<i>Playing computer game.</i>


<i>Going to a movie.</i>


<i>Playing soccer.</i>
<i>Watching TV.</i>


- Give some more activities.
b. Ask and answer:


- T explains some adverbs of frequency:


always usually often sometimes seldom never.


+ Position: <i>- trớc động từ thờng.</i>


<i>- sau động từ to be.</i>


<i>- giữa trợ động từ và động từ thờng(thể phủ định và nghi vấn).</i>


- Ss work individually to write the activities they do everyday.
- Call some Ss to read aloud their sentences.


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs with the question:


<i>How often do you ... ?</i>


- Call some Ss to practice aloud.


Model Sentences:



<i> - On Monday, I usually do my homework with Hoa and Ba after school.</i>


<i> - On Tuesday, I sometimes go swimming with my friends after school.</i>


<i> - On Wednesday, aftre school, I often play computer games with my friends.</i>
<i> - I never go to the movies on Thursday.</i>


<i> - I usually watch TV on Friday evening.</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Activities after school with the Adv of frequency.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


______________________________________________________________________


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b> T: Period 33:A3-A4</b>
<b>.</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further practice on reading comprehension.


- Further practice on listening to get specific information.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


Textbook, cassette and tape.III
.III. Teaching procedure:


1. Organization:


- Date : ...7A:... ...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Homework correction.


<i><b>3. New lesson</b></i>
<i><b>:A. Warm- up: </b></i>


- Introduce the lesson.
B. Presentationa. A3


<b>* Pre - reading:</b>


- Ask Ss to guess the activities after school in the pictures of each.


<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Ss read the text silently, guess the same ideas.
- T explains sone new words:


rehearse school anniversary celebration orchestra


stamp collector’s club comics.


- Ss read the text again to find the information for the given questions.
- Ss compare their answers with their partners.



- Call some Ss to read their answers aloud.
- T corrects and gives the right ones.:


<i>a) Her theater group is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration.</i>
<i>b) He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend.</i>


<i>c) The stamp collectpr s clup meets on Wednesday afternoon.</i>’


<i>d) Nam never plays games.</i>
<b>* Post - reading:</b>


- Ss answer the questions, ss answer:


<i>What does Nga like doing after school hours ?</i>


<i>What do Ba and his friends often do on Wednesday afternoon ?</i>
<b> A4. Listen. Match each name to an activity.</b>


- Explain the tasks, ss listten.


- Play the tape for Ss to practice listening for three times.
- Ss answer and compare their answers with their partners.
- Call some Ss to give their own answers.


- Play the tape the last time and pause at each information for Ss to check.
- Give the right answers, ss copy in their notes:


<i>a) Mai - go to school cafeteria.</i>
<i>b) Nam - rehearse a play.</i>
<i>c) Ba - go to the cicus.</i>


<i>d) Lan - watch a movie.</i>
<i>e) Kien - tidy the classroom.</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Work in groups to build up a new dialogue.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex3,4 in workbook.
- Prepare for the next class.


- Learn new words, read smoothly the text.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Preparing

Period 34.Unit 6: After school.



T: Lesson 4: B. Let's go (B1).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson ss can be able to use some structures to make an invitation, to take
and refuse the invitation.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan,cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>



...7A:...,……….7B...


<i><b> 2. Oral test:</b></i>


- Do ex3,4 on the BB, others remark.
- Read the text then answer T's questions.


- Write new words, read then give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice in groups of four.</b>


- Ss look at the pictures on P.64.


- Ss guess what Ba, Nam, Lan and Hoa are discussing what to do .


- T plays the tape, Ss listen then check whether their guessings are right or wrong.
- Ss practice reading the dialogue in pairs.


- Call some pairs to read aloud.
- T explains some structures:


<i>What about + V-ing ....?</i>


<i>Why don t you + V.. ?</i>’
- Make some examples to make clear:


<i>What about going to the movies ?</i> <i>Great / Oh, I d love to.</i>’


<i>Why don t you relax ?</i>’ <i>I am sorry...</i>
<i>Let s go to Hoa s house.</i>’ ’


- Ask Ss to answer the given questions in textbook.
- Ss compare their answers with their partners.
- Call some Ss to give the answers on the BB.
- T asks the rest to do it orally.


- T corrects and gives the right ones:


<i>a. Nam wants to go to the movies.</i>


<i>b. Lan doesn t want to go to the movies because there aren t any good movies at </i>’ ’


<i>the moment.</i>


<i>c. Lan wants to listen to some music at home.</i>


<i>d. Hoa doesn t want to go to Lan s house because she has so many assignments.</i>’ ’


<i>e. It s Saturday.</i>’
- Ss copy the right answers.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>



- Sum up the main content of the conversation.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex1 in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.
- Learn new words by heart.


.


………


Preparing...

Period 35. Unit 6: After school.



T: Lesson 5: B. Let's go.(B2).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

- To develop the main skills especially reading comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan, tape and cassette, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...
...7B:...



<i><b> 2. ORAL TEST:</b></i>


- Write newwords, read then make example and give meaning .
- Read the B1 by heart then answer T' questions, others remark.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson : Ss are supposed to answer the questions : What do you do at
your free time ?


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


B2. Read and discuss.


<b>* Pre - reading:</b>


- Ss list the activities that Vietnamese Ss as well as Americi Ss often do.
- T introduces the contents of the lesson.


- Ss guess what the activities are in the picture freely.
- Give feedback.


<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Ss read the passage once aloud.


- Teach some new words in the passage:


Scout (boy scout) Guide (girl guide) coin leisure



musical instrument models teenager attend


- Make clear the aim of each organization.


- Ss read the passage again and tell the name of the organizations in the passage.
- Ask ss to answer the orgs


<b>* Post - reading:</b>


- Ask Ss to discuss in groups about the organization in Vietnam, T helps if necessary.
- Call some Ss in each group to present.


- Ss practice speaking the popular activities that Vietnamese teenagers often do.


- Ss practice speaking about the favorite activities American ss often do and Vnese ss
like :


- watching TV
- listening to music
- helping the old.
- Going to the movies.


- Ss discuss to find the organirations inVN for the teenagers : The pioneers' association,
the youth organiration, the different clubs.


- Ss discuss their favorite clubs, then each group read their activities, others compare.
- T sums up the most popular activities ss like best.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>



- Remind Ss the structures to give requests, ask for and reply to an invitation.
- The activities American ss like best.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex 1,2 in workbook.


- Learn ten activities American ss like best


<i><b> - Prepare for the next lesson.</b></i>


<i><b>_________________________________________________________________</b></i>
<i><b>Preparing ... </b></i>

Period 36: Unit 6. After

school.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- After the lesson, Ss will be able to make their own invitation and reply to an invitation


by using the tructures : Would you like…? ; Yes, I'd love to. ; It's my pleasure. You are


welcome.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan, workbook, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>



- Date : ...7A:...
...7B:...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex1,2 on the BB, others remark.


- Read ten activities by heart then answer T' questions.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson: What do you usually do at your free time ?
Ss answer freely using the activities from the last period.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:


<b>B3.Listen. Then practice with a partner. Make similar dialogues.</b>


- Give some guided questions, ss can answer in VNese:


<i>Which situation do you use invitation ?</i>


<i>In which occasions do you use these invitations ?</i>
<i>How do you accept or refuse the invitation ?</i>


- T explains the task in this part to learn to invite to accept the invitation and refuse the
invitation politely.


- Play the tape once for Ss to practice listening.



- T asks ss to give, and present some structures and give esx for each:


<b>+ to give an invitation:</b>


<i>Would you like to ... ?(the popular way)</i>


<i>Why don t you ...?,What about...?(the informal way)</i>’


<b>+ to accept:</b>
<i>Yes, I d love to</i>’


<i>That would be fun</i>.


<b>+ to refuse:</b>


<i>I d love to but. I m sorry I can t.</i>’ ’ ’


<b>+ reply the thanks</b>
<i>You are welcome.</i>


<i>It's my pleasure.</i>


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to make and reply to an ivitation.
- Give some words or phrases for Ss to practice.


<b> 4. Consolidation:</b>


<i>B4.Read. Then discuss.</i>



+ Read:


- Ask Ss what the teenagers do for the community.
- Ask Ss to read the passage.


- Call some Ss to give the answers.
+ Discuss:


- Ask Ss to discuss in groups of 4, think about the activities that teenagers can
help.


- Ask Ss to list what Vietnamese teenagers can help the community.
- Call a representative in each group to present.


- Give some remarks.
+ Vocabulary:


community service: volunteer candy striper striped


concern about campaign clean up


<b>5. Homework:</b>


- Review all techniques. - Do Ex3,4 in


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

- Write newwords by heart.
- Prepare for the next period.


Preparing ...

Period 37. Language focus 2

<b>.</b>



T:


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with all key grammar points and have a
good preparation for the test.


- To develop the main skills especially reading writing comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan, workbook, extra board.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B...


<i><b> 2. ORAL TEST:</b></i>


- Do ex3,4 on the BB, others remark.


- Write newwords, read then give the meaning.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation</b>:



a. Present progressive tense:


- Ask Ss to present again the way to practice with this tense.
- Ss do the task given.


- Call some ss to give their answers.
- Give the right ones:


<i>doing - is writing - is reading - is cooking - are playing - is kicking - is running.</i>


- Ss copy the answers.


b. This & that, these & those:


- Ss present again the ways to use those.
- Ask Ss to practice individually.


- Call some Ss to give their answers orally.


- Give the answers: that, that,this,these, those, these, these, these.
c. Time:


- Ask Ss to present the ways to tell the time.


- Ask Ss to practice with the Ex given in textbook.
- Call some Ss to give their answers.


- Give more example time for Ss to practice.
d. Vocabulary: subjects.



- Ask Ss to do the matching.
- Ss give their own answers.
- T gives the right ones:


<i>a) Physical education.</i> <i>b) Chemistry</i> <i>c) Math</i>


<i>d) Geography</i> <i>e) English</i> <i>f) History</i>


e. Adverbs of frequency:


- T explains the ways to practice.
- Do some as examples:


<i>Ba seldom rides bike to school.</i>
<i>He sometimes plays computar game.</i>


f. Making suggesstions:


- Ss revise some ways to practice with these ways to make suggestions.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Note down some key points.


* The present progressive tense.
* Adverbs of frequence


* Making suggestions.



<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review all key points to prepare for the test.


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 38: Written test 2



<i>Teaching date:../../2008 </i>
<i><b>I. Objectives: </b></i>


- To check up Ss’ knowlegue from unit4 to unit6.


- To develop the main skills especially presenting in their tests.
- Find out the bad points to consolidate for ss.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>Le qui don secondary school.</b>

Written test 2.



<b>Name:……….</b> <b> Time limitted:45'</b>
<b>Class: 7...</b>


A. Questions :


<i><b>I. Listen to the tape then complete the sentences below.(1 point)</b></i>


1. The yard is so crowded and………


2. Jonh often plays ………


3. Susan ……….. skips rope at recess.



4. Ba………..playing marbles.


5. They are…… excited and having a good time.


<i><b>II. Read the passage. Then answer the questions below.(2 points)</b></i>


<i>Mrs. lan has two jobs. On Tuesdays, Wednesdays and fridays she works in a </i>
<i>clinic where she looks after sick children. She often goes to work at 6.45 by motorbike. </i>
<i>On Mondays and Thursdays she stays at home and writes for a Pioneer newspaper. She </i>
<i>loves writing a lot and never stops writing. </i>


<i>At the weekends they often cook meal for their friends, then go out or stay at home to </i>
<i>chat and listen to music. They never go to bed before ten o'clock.</i>


6. How many jobs does Mrs. Lan have?


=>……….


7. Who does she take care of ? Where?


=>……….


8. When is she at home?


=>……….


9. Does she write for a Nhan Dan newspaper?


=>……….



10. Do they always go to bed after ten o'clock?


=>………


<i><b>III. Rewrite the sentences with the meaning unchange.(2 points)</b></i>


11. It's ten forty five.


=> It's………..


12. My favorite subject is Math.


=> I……….


13. He is never late to school.


=> He is………


14. Don't talk in the classroom.


=> You should………


15. Let's play catch.


=> Why……….


<i><b>IV. Give the correct form of words.(1 point)</b></i>


16. She is very …………..She lives so far from her family.(happy)



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

18. You are very nice. - It's my………(please)


19. Thosebooks in the library are in ………. order.(alphabet)


20. Nam is very ………comics because they are ………(interest)


<i><b>V. Give the correct form of verbs.(1,5 points)</b></i>


21. This afternoon I (help)... Van do Geography assignment. Because she


(not understand)……… the lesson.


22. Why are your hands dirty?Oh, I (do)……… in the garden.


23. Every twelve months, the earth (go around)………. the sun.


24. Look out of the window, it (rain)……….?


25. They (often go) to the seaside for the summer. But this summer, they (go) to
the mountainous resort.


<i><b>VI. Choose the best answers.(1 point)</b></i>


26. It's easy to find book …… the title.


A. at B. on C. in D. by


27. The post office has about eighty…… work there.


A. employs B. employers C. employees D.employ



28. Is football……….unpopular activity after school?


A. a B. an C. o D. the


29. In Literature, we learn ………stories and poems.


A. do B. how to read C. understand D. read


30. Why ………..you play football?- Yes, let's.


A. do B. does C.are D. don't


<i><b>VII. Write the sentences using the given cues, make changes if necessary.(1.5 points)</b></i>


31.What/ your favorite subject?


=>……….


32. What/ you/ learn/ Geography?- We/ learn/ maps/ different countries.


=>………


…...
33. What/ Mai/ usually/ do/ recess?- She/ skip rope/recess.


=>……….


34.There/ many kinds/entertainments/young people.



=>………


35. How/ your father/ go/ work/everyday?


=>……….


<b>The end.</b>


<b>III.Testing process:</b>


1. Class settlement:


Date………..7A………..7B……… ………7C .7D……….


2.Deliver the test copies :


- T delivers the copies to ss without any explanation.
- Observe ss do the tast independently and strictly.
3. Collect the completed tests after the bell.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Do the tests seriously.
5. Homework:


- Prepare the next lesson.


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 39.Unit 7.The world of work.



Teaching date../../2008 Lesson 1. A. A student's work(A1).



<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, ss will be able to know to speak about the work, the study and the
vacation.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, work book, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……….7B……… ……… ……… ………., 7C ., .7D…………


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Going with the new lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson by asking some questions.
Ex. What time do you go to school?


B.<b> Presentation: </b>


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>


<b>* Pre - reading:</b>


- Give some guided questions:


What time do your classes start ?


What do they finish ?


For how many hours a day do you do your homework ?


- T introduces the lesson, ss listen.


- Ss listen to the tape twice, notes the daily work and vacation.
- T asks ss: What do you listen about Hoa's learning activities?
- T explains some new words and phrases:


<i>to be late for sth: muộn làm việc gì.</i>


<i>That take two hours to do ST: mất hai tiếng để làm việc gì.</i>
<i>Summer vacation(AE) = summer holiday(BE).</i>


<i>Last: kÐo dµi.</i>
<i>quite= very</i>


<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Ss practice reading in pairs .


- Call some pairs to practice reading aloud, note the intornation.
- Ask Ss to answer the given questions in textbook in pairs.



- Call two Ss to write the answers on the board while the rest do it orally.
- Give feedback.


- T gives the right onesopy in their notes:


<i>a) They start at 7 o clock.</i>’


<i>b) They finish at a quarter past eleven.</i>
<i>c) Hoa does her homework 2 hours a day.</i>


<i>d) She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation.</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


<b>* Post - reading:</b>


- Ss practice asking and answering about Ss’ work.


Example Exchange:


S1: What time do your classes start?
S2: They start at 1 o’clock.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

S2: ... Soan du giao an trong tuan.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i> <i><b>Ngay../../2008</b></i>


- Do the Ex1,2 in workbook.
- Learn A1 by heart.



- Prepare for the text. Nguyen Thi Hien.


.


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 40. Unit 7: The world of work.



Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 2: A. A student's work.(A2)


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, ss can be able to know more about the vacations in Viet Nam as well
as in America.


- To develop the main skills especially reading comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, work book, teaching plan, cassette and tape.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……… …… ………… ………… ………7B .., 7C , 7D……...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex1,2 on the BB, others observe and remark.
- Read the dialogue in pairs then answer T' s questions.



<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


Lucky numbers


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>A2. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>
<b>* Pre - reading:</b>


- Give open prediction about the content of the lesson.
- Explain some new words in the letter.


* Vocabulary: Thanks/thank you for hear celebrate


<b>+ Easter: ngay le cua Thien Chua Giao (cuoi tuan cuoi </b>
<b>thang 3/ dau thang 4.) </b>


<b>+ thanksgiving: Bua an truyen thong co ga tay, ga nhoi, </b>
<b>khoai lang, banh my bap, rau luoc va banh nhan bi(ngay </b>
<b>thu nam tuan thu 4 thang 11)</b>


<b>+ christmas: 25/12</b>


<b>+ 4th<sub> of July: ngay thong nhat(QK)</sub></b>
<b>+ New year's day: 1.1 DL</b>


- T asks ss if they know these days or give more information.



<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Ss read the letter for the first time , then compare with their guessing.


- Ss read the letter to answer the given questions, T helps read some new difficult words.
- T asks ss to read the dialogue again to answer the questions.


- Ss compore their answers with their friends, then ask them to read the answers, other
remark.


- Give the correct answers:


a) Summer vacation is the longest in America.


b) During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family.


c) Vietnamese students have fewer vacation than American students.


<b>* Post- reading:</b>


- T asks ss to read the letter again, stop at each passage to check the keys and explain
the grammar.


a few+ countable N


- Ss practice speaking about the vacations in Viet Nam such as: May Day, National
Independent Day


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

- Repeat the important days in VN as well as in America.
- Make sentences with comparison of nouns.



<b>5. Home work:</b>


- Learn new words by heart.
- Do ex3 in the work book.
- Prepare for the new lesson.


<i><b>5. Homework</b></i> <i><b>Soan du giao an trong tuan:</b></i>


- Do the Ex1,2 in workbook. Ngay../../2008


- Prepare the next lesson.


- Learn new words and A1 by heart.


Nguyen Thi Hien.


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 41. Unit7: The world of work.



Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 3: A. A student's work(A3,4).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


After the lesson, ss can be able to know and use the vocabulary about the work of a
student, continue to learn deeply about American vacations.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading comprehension.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, work book, teaching plan, tape and casette.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……….7B……… ………., .7C……… ………, ..7D………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex1,2 on the BB, others remark.


- Write new words, read then give the meanings.
- Read A1 the answer T's questions.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce some big and important vacations in Viet Nam as well as in America.


Ex: Tet vacation National independent day May Day


Christmas Thanksgiving Easter…


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>A3. Listen. Write the name of the public holiday in each of these pictures.</b>
<b>* Pre - listening:</b>



- Ss guess the public holiday in the picture, T gives the cues. ex: ga tay, cay thong…


- Write Ss’ guessing on the BB.


- T asks ss to listen to the tape to match the big vacations with the correct pictures.


<b>* While - listening:</b>


- Ss listen to the tape twice.


- Ss compare their answers with their guessing with their partner.
- Play the tape for Ss to check their answers.


- Give feedback.


- Give the right ones, ss copy in their notes:


a) Thanks giving: on the fifth day of the fourth week in Nov.
b) Independence Day.


c) New year’s Eve.
d) Christmas.


<b>* Post- listening:</b>


- Give some more American celebrations:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

- T elicits some words from ss ex:


public holiday firework display midnight.



- Ss dicuss about some big vacations in VN.


<b>A4. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>
<b>* Pre - reading:</b>


- Give guided questions, ss answer in VNese in order to develop the vocabulary:


What do you do everyday ?


Is your work at school hard or OK?


How many hours a day do you study ?


Do you have to do a lot of homework ?


- T explains the tasks, ss listen.


<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Ss read the text once, Ss give out the main ideas of the text.
- T asks ss to explain the grammar structures:


fewer...than...
more...than...


Ex. This is fewer hours than any workers.


- Ss read the text again, then work in groups to answer the given questions, T doesn't
explain anything, ss try to guess the meanings of the situation.



- Ss compare their answers with the others.
- Give feedback, others remark.


- Give the right answers, ss copy in their notes:


 Because they think Ss only work a few hours a week and have long vacations.


 Hoa work 20 hours a week. It is fewer than most workers'work.


 No, he doesn't.


<b>* Post - reading:</b>


- Remind Ss some important celebrations in America.


- Ss discuss about the number of periods and hours of theirs.
- Elicit some words if necessary.


take a look= have a look keen typical review definitely


write …writer few(fewer)


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Repeat some big vacations in VN as well as in America.
- Revise the work of a student.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>



- Do Ex3,4 in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.


- Learn new words, read the text smoothly.


………


Preparing date:../../2008 Period 42: Test correction


Teaching date:../../2008


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Check ss'knowlegue through unit4 to unit6 and find out the bad points in order to
improve for ss


- To develop the mains skills especially presenting in the test.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Marked tests, extra board, teaching plan.


<b>III. Teaching process:</b>
<i><b>1.Class settlement:</b></i>


Attendence:….7A…… … ….., .. .7B……… … …., .. ..7C… …… … ……. , . 7D……….


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- During the lesson.



<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


A. Warm up:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

B. Presentation:


1. Give the keys of the test:


<b>I. 1 point(0,2 x5) .</b>


1. noisy


2. blindman's bluff.
3. sometimes.
4. are.


5. all.


<b>II. 2points (0,4x5).</b>


6. She has two jobs.


7. She takes care of sick children.


8. She is at home on Thursdays and Mondays.
9. No, she doesn't.


10. Yes, they do.



<b>III. 2points (0,4x5)</b>


11. a quarter to eleven.
12. like Math best.


13. always early to school.
14. not talk in the classroom.
15. don't you play catch ?


<b>IV.1point (0,2x5)</b>


16. unhappy.
17. famous.
18. pleasure.
19. alphabetical.


20. interested in- interesting


<b>V. 1,5 points (0,3x5)</b>


21. am helping, doesn't understand.
22. am doing.


23. goes around


24. is… raining


25. often go, will go.


<b>VI. 1 point (0,2x5)</b>



26.D
27.C
28.B
29.B
30.D


<b>VII. 1,5 points (0,3x5)</b>


31.What is your favorite subject?
32. What do you learn in Geograhphy?


- We learn about maps and different countries.
33. What does Mai usually do at recess?


- She (usually) skips rope at recess.


34. There are many kinds of entertainments for young people.
35.How does your father go to work everyday ?


2. Remarks :


- The mistakes ss often make:
Dictation.


False structures.


Lazy. Soan du giao an trong tuan.


Not think. Ngay../../2008.



4. Consolidation:
- Give feedback.
5. Home work :


- Prepare for the next lesson. Nguyen Hien.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Preparing date:../../2008

Period 43: Unit 7. The world of work.


Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 4: B. The worker.(B1,2)


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, ss can be able to describe the difference, the same of each work as
well as the importance and the value of each work.


- Ss revise the comperison: fewer…than, more… than.


- To develop the main skills especially reading comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape & cassette, work book, teaching plan.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,………..7B……… ……., ..7C……… ……., ..7D…………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>



- Ss do ex 1,2 on the BB, others remark.
- Read and answer T's questions.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Lucky numbers: 1,4,8 are lucky numbers.


<i>2. How many hours a day do you learn?</i>


<i>3. How many hours a day do you do your home work?</i>
<i>5. What do you do during the Tet holiday?</i>


<i>6. Are ss hard or lazy?</i>
<i>7. Are you lazy?</i>


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>B1. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.</b>
<b>* Pre- reading:</b>


- Present the task.


- T asks ss to guess the content of the letter.
- Play the tape for Ss to practice listening.
- Explain some new words:


homeless people mechanic: thợ cơ khí.
prefer: thích hơn. shift: ca làm việc
however: tuy nhiên days off: ngày nghỉ.


part time work: công việc bán thời gian(nửa ngày)


- Ss read then answer the questions:


? How many people are there in Tim's family?
? Who does Tim write about in the letter?


<b> * While - reading:</b>


- Ss practice reading silently, then answer T's questions given above.
- Ask Ss to read again, then answer the questions given in textbook.
- Give feedback, compare their answers with their partners.


- Give the right answers, ss copy in their notes:


a) She works at home. But 3 mornings a week she works part- time at a local supermarket.
b) She cooks lunch for homeless people once a week.


c) He is a mechanic.


d) He usually works about 40 hours a week.


e) They always go to Florida on vacation. They have a great time there.


- T plays again then stops at the difficult sentences to check the keys and explains the


new grammar notes : fewer + N + than…, more + N + than…


- Ask some Ss to practice reading the letter aloud, note the intornation.



<b>* Post - reading:</b>


- Ask Ss about the content of the letter.


<b>B2. Read.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

- Ss look at the picture, then guess the job of the man in the picture.
- Ask Ss : What are the daily duties of a farmer ?


- Ask Ss to list what a farmer has to do everyday as many as possible in VN then change
into E.


<b>* While - reading:</b>


- Read through the text about Mr Tuan, discuss and compare the works of a farmer.
- T elicits and explains some new words in this part:


feed: cho ăn buffalo: con trâu collect : thu, nhặt, luom
grow rice: trồng lúa crop: vụ, mùa màng buffalo shed: chuồng trâu
Chicken coop: chuång gµ real: thËt, thùc tÕ.


- Call some Ss to read the text aloud.


- Ask Ss to read the text again, then compare the work of Tim’s Dad and Hoa’s Dad.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs, some pairs read others remark.


- Ss compare their answers with their partners


<b>* Post - reading: </b>



- Call some Ss to fill in the table.
- T corrects and gives the right ones:


- Brainstormings. find the works then describe about each work.
4. Consolidation:


- T repeats the works of a mechanic and a farmer.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex3,4 in workbook.
- Prepare the next lesson.
- Learn new words by heart.


.


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 44. Unit 7: The world of work.



Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 5: B. The worker(B3,4)


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson ss can be able to understand much more about some works.
- To develop the main skills especially listening comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan, tape and cassette.



<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……… ……… ……7B .., ..7C……… ………….., .7D………


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


During the new lesson.


<b> 3. New lesson:</b>
<b>A. Warm up:</b>


- Give some thing about a mechanic and a farmer.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>
<b>B3. Compare.</b>


- After reading the text, ss sum up the main knowlegue and compare the works of an
engineer and the works of a worker base on the cues in the exercise.


- Ss work in pairs to complete the information.


- Ask some pairs to read their answer fefore the classs, others remark, supply if
necessary.


- T observes then corrects , ss copy in their notes


Hours per week Days off Vacation time



Mr Jones 40 2 A three week summer vacation


Mr Tuan 84 1- 4 or 5 times<sub>a year</sub> No real vacation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

- Give open discussion .


- Ask Ss to discuss about one’s job with these guided , T helps if necessary:


<i>working hours.</i>
<i>Daily duties.</i>


<i>Amount of vaction.</i>


- Ss work in groups of 4 or 5.


- Each group sends 1 representative to present what they have discussed.
- T gives some remarks.


<b> * While - listening:</b>


- T explains the tasks, introduces some new words .


on duty for annual


- Play the tape three times for Ss to practice.


- Ss can exchange the information they got with their partners.
- Call some Ss to fill in the table, others read theirnotes.


- Give the right answers, ss copy in their notes:



Name Job Hours per week Amounts of vacation


Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks


Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks


Jane Shop assistant 35 1 week


Phong Factory worker 48 2 weeks


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


<b>* Post - listening:</b>


- Remind Ss the character of some works.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Write new words ,read, then give the meanings.


- Make clear the difference between a machanic and a farmer.
- Do ex on the BB, others observe then remark.


..


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 45. Unit 8: Places.




Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 1: A. Asking the way ( A1,2).


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson, ss can be able to use the way to ask and answer the way to some


where by using structures: Could you show/tell me…?


- To develop the main skills especially listening comprehesion.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, teaching plan, tape & cassette


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……… ……… ……… …… ………7B .., 7C .., ..7D……...


<i><b> 2.Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ss go to the BB and skeak about the works of a farmer and the works of a mechanic.
- Others do ex on the BB, others remark.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Revise some places by playing games : net work


<b>B. Presentation: </b>



A1. Name some places:


- Ss look at the pictures in textbook, then name those places.
- Call some Ss to read those places aloud.


- Give feedback.


- T gives the right answers, ss listen, correct and copy in their notes :


a) State/ National bank of Vietnam.
b) Saint Paul hospital.


c) Hotel.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

e) Hanoi Railway Station.
f) Dongxuan market.


- T notes the own name standing before the place names
- Give some questions:


- Are there any similar places in our country ? Name some.
A2. Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner:
- Ss look at the picture and answer these guided questions:


 Who are they ?


 Where are they ?


 What does the tourist want ?



- Ss listen to the tape twice, then practice reading in pairs.
- Call some pairs to read the dialogue aloud.


- Introduce some structures to ask and give the ways:


 <i>Could you tell me how to get to ...?</i>
 <i>Could you show/tell me the way to…?</i>
 <i>Go straight ahead.</i>


 <i>Take the second street on the left.</i>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue (b), then find out where the tourist wants to go to.
- Ss find out the other way to ask for the way:


Could you tell me the way to ...?
- Call some pairs to read this dialogue aloud.


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


- Open practice : T hangs a picture, asks ss to practice by using the learnt structures.


- T helps if necessary. Soan du giao an trong tuan.


<b>5. Home work:</b> <b>Ngay../../2008</b>


- Read the text by heart.


- Do ex1,2 in the exercise book.
- Prepare for the next lesson.



Nguyen Hien.


………


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 46. Unit 8: Places.



Teaching date:../../2008 Lesson 2: A. Asking the way (A3,4,5) .


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- After the lesson,Ss will be able to tell the ways to a place, and revise the structure


asking and answering about the distance: How far is it from… …to ?


- To develop the main skills especially listening comprehension.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape & cassette, teaching plan.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,……… …… ……… ……… ………7B .., 7C , .7D………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex on the BB, others observe then remark.
- Read the text and answer T's questions.



<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Practice asking the way to some where.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>A3. Look at this street map. Practice the dialogue with a partner.</b>


* Pre- speaking:


- Ask Ss to do the network:


opposite between


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Ss give some examples with those prepositions.
* While - speaking:


- Ss resay the ways to ask direction to a place:


 <i>Could you tell me how to get to ...?</i>
 <i>Could you tell me the way to ...?</i>


- Ss say again the way to give instructions.


- Ask Ss to practice asking and giving instructions to the places given basing on the map.
Example Exchanges:



S1: Where is the bank ?


S2: The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.


- Call some pairs to practice aloud.
* Post - speaking:


- Ask Ss to ask the directions to the real places in their local:
the market - the post office - the Auco Temple.


<b>A4.Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with apartner.</b>


<b>-</b> Present the tasks.


- Ss listen to tape twice, then practice reading the dialogue in pairs.
- Call some pairs to read the dialogue aloud.


- Present the structure:


It takes + N + Time + to V…


Ex: It takes Hoa ten minutes to go to school.


<b>A5. Look at this table of distances in km. Ask and answer questions with a </b>
<b>partner:</b>


- Present the tasks.


- Ask Ss to read these sentences in the dialogue again:



<i>How far ist it from Hanoi ?</i>
<i>I think it s about 680 km.</i>’


<i>How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh City ?</i>
<i>I think it s abpout 1,030 km. </i>’


- Ask Ss to answer these questions:


What are those questions used for ? For asking the distance from a place to another place.
How can you answer it ? It s about ... m / km.’


- T helps Ss revise the ways to ask and answer the distance to a place:


How far is it from + (name of a place) + to + (name of a place) ?
It is (about)... meters / kilometers.


- T gives an example to make it clear:


<i><b> Thanh Son / Hanoi / 170 km:</b></i>


<i>How far is it from Thanh Son to Hanoi ?</i>
<i>It is about 170 kilometers.</i>


- Ask Ss to practice with the places given in texbook in pairs.
- Call some pairs to practice.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the way to ask and answer the distance to place.


- Give Word Cue Drill:


<i>a. Thanh son/ Viet Tri /45 km.</i>
<i>b. Thanh Son / Yen Bai City/65 km.</i>
<i><b>5.Home work:</b></i>


- Do ex 3,4 in the workbook.


- Prapare for t

Period 47. Unit 8: Places.

eaching


date:../../2008 Lesson 4: B. At the post office


(B1).<b>Objective</b>Afterheesson,Sswill be able to ask and answer the price of things and


usestructure : How much….?, the polite request with : Would you like…?


- To develop the main skills especially listening comprehension.<b>II. Preparation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1.Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,...7B:...,……….7C……… ………., .7D………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- During the lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>



- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b> B1.Listen and read .Then practice with a partner.</b>


* Pre - reading:


- Ss look at the picture of a post office and answer the question:


What are the services of the post office for ?
- sending/ receiving letter / postcard.


- sending / receiving parcel


- Making long / short distance phone calls.
- selling envelopes / stamps.


- Ss listen to the tape twice.
- T explains some new words:


<i>altogether</i>: tổng cộng /tính gộp lại


<i>change</i>: tiền lẻ
- Ss listen to the again.
* While - reading:


- Ss practice reading the dialogue in pairs.
- Call some pairs to practice reading aloud.


+ New structure:


I’d like to + V ... .(I would like to + V ...)
I’d like + N


Examples:


<i>I d like to send a letter.</i>’


<i>I d like some stamps.</i>’


+ Structures to ask and answer the price of things:


How much do / does + S + cost ? It costs .../ They cost ...


Is / are + S ? It is .../ They are...


Examples:


How much does this book cost ? It costs 5,000 dong.


How much is this book ? It is 5,000 dong.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to answer the given questions.
- Give feedback.


- Give the right answers:


<i>a. She will mail her letter to USA.</i>
<i>b. She pays 11,500 dong altogether.</i>


<i>c. She receives 3,500 dong in change.</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


* Post - reading


- Ss practice asking and answering about the prices of the given things:


<i>a. Those shirts / 350,000dong.</i>
<i>b. That store / 5,400 dong.</i>
<i>c. This scaft / 12,000 dong.</i>
<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Read the dialogue smoothly.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Preparing date:../../2008

Period 48. Unit 8: Places.



Teaching date:../../2008 <b> Lesson 4: B. At the post office(B2,3).</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Practice in vocabulary of post office.


- After the lesson,Ss will be able to make a conversation dialing with the post office,
develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exerccise book,tape & cassette.



<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,...7B:...,……….7C……… ………., 7D……….


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- During the lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b> B2.Listen and read then answer the questions.</b>


* Pre - reading:
- Set the scene:


You will here a conversation between Nga and Hoa. They are on the way to the
post office. Can you guess what they want ?


- Ss listen to the tape once.
- T explains some new words:


local stamp: tem th trong nớc.


overseas mail: th quốc tế.
phone card: thẻ điện thoại
pen pal:


regurlar


- Ss listen to the tape twice again.
* While - reading:


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue silently, then compare with what they have guessed.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.


- Call some pairs to read it aloud.


- Ask Ss to answer the given questions in textbook.
- Give feedback.


- Give the right answers:


a. She needs some local stamps, some stamps for overseas mail and a phonecard.
b. Because she has a pen pal in America.


c. Because she phones her parents once a week.


- Ask Ss to write down the answers into their notebooks.
* Post - reading:


- Remind Ss the key points in this lesson.


<b>B3. Complete the dilogue. Then make up similar dilogues; use the words in the </b>


<b>box.</b>


- Set the scene:


<i>You will hear a conversation between Hoa and a post office clerk, but there is </i>
<i>some unfinished information. Now you read and complete the conversation.</i>


- Ss work individually.


- Ss compare their answers with their partners.
- Ss give their answer aloud.


- T corrects and ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue aloud.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i> <i><b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b></i>


- Repeat the main knowlegue. Ngµy../../2008


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Do Ex in workbook.


- Prepare for the next lesson. NgyÔn HiÒn.


- Read the dilogue by heart.


***************************************


Preparing date:../../200

Period 49. Unit 8: Places.




Teaching date:../../200 <b> Lesson 5: B.At the post office (B4,5).</b>


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further Practice in speaking about the price of things.


- After the lesson,Ss will be able to make their own dialogue about the price of things.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, tape & cassette, real things


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,………….7B……… ………., ..7C………,...7D...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- During the lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>B4. Listen and write the price of each of these five items.</b>



- Ss look at the pictures and write the names of things in those.


<i>(pen , envelope , stamps , phone card.)</i>


- Ss guess the price of each thing.
- T introduces:


<i>These are the things which Mrs Robinson will buy. Now you listen and</i>
<i> say the cost of each item as well as the total cost of all those things.</i>


- Ss listen to the tape for three times, then answer the questions:


What is the total cost ?


How much change will Mrs Robinson have from 60,000 dong ?


- Ss listen, then compare their answers with their partners.
- Give feedback.


- Play the tape once again, and pause at each information fopr Ss to check.
- Give the right answers:


 The total cost: 59,000 dong including:


 A pen: 1,500 dong.


 A packet of envelope: 2,000 dong.


 A writing pad: 3,000 dong.



 Five stamps: 2,500 dong.


 A phone card: 50,000 dong.


<b>B5. Answer the following questions</b>


- Ss practice asking and answering further about the price.
- Ss practice in pairs, then T calls some Ss to practice orally.
- Givesome remarks.


Give the answers:


a, It is 1000 VND.


b, It is about 16000 VND.


c, Receiving the letters, postal, etc.
d, Yes, I do. It's my brother./ No, I don't.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the key points.
- Revise the structures .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

- Do the Ex in workbook.
- Prepare for the next lesson.
- Write a letter to your friend.


*******************************************



Preparing date:../../200.

Period 50: Revision.



Teaching date:../../200


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further Practice in all key grammar points of the first term.


- After the lesson,Ss will be able to practice fluently all key grammar points of the first
semester.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,...7B:...,……… ………… ……7C , ..7D…….


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- During the lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.



<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<b>I. The Present Simple tense:</b>


- Use: to express the habitual action.


- Form: Aff: I / We / You / They / Plural N + V + O


He / She / It / Singular N + Vs/es + O


Neg: S + do/does + not + V…


Intro: Do/does + S + V…?


W-H words + do/does + S + V…?


- Examples:


I work for that company.
Dogs bark.


He smokes a lot.


She often carries heavy things.


<b>II. The Present Progressive tense:</b>


- Use: For an action happening now.
- Form: Aff: I + am + V-ing + O



He / She / It / Singular N + is + V-ing + O
We / You / They / Plural N + are + V-ing + O.


Neg: S + Be + Ving…


Intro: Be + S + Ving …?


? W-H words + Be + S + Ving?
- Examples:


I am working now.


Nam is watching TV in his room.
Those boys are playing soccer.


<b>III. The comparisons:</b>


<i><b>1. The comparative of adjectives:</b></i>


- Form: + short adjectives:


S + be + adjective-er + than + O
+ long adjective:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

- Examples:


Nam is taller than Hoa.


This dress is more expensive than that dress.



<b>2. The superlative:</b>


- Form: * short adjectives:


S + be + the + short adjective-est.
* long adjectives:


S + be + the most + long adjectives.
+Irregurlar:


good - better - the best
bad - worse - the worst
little - less - the least
many - more - the most.


<b>3. Comparative of nouns.</b>


* Hon:


S1 + V + more + N + than + S2 + AuxV.


* Kem:


S1 + V + fewer/less + N + than + S2 + AuxV.


* Bang:


S1 + V/be + as/so + N + as + S2 + AuxV.



<b>IV. Exclamative sentences:</b>


What + a(n) + adj + N !
What + adj + Ns!


How + adj + N + AuxV!


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Remind Ss the key points.


- Ask ss to learn by heart all the main points above.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review the key points.
- Prepare the next lesson.


****************************************


Preparing date:../../200

Period 51: Revision.



Teaching date:../../200


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Further Practice in all key grammar points.


- After the lesson,Ss will be able to practice fluently all key grammar points and do
exercises, develop the main skills esp speaking and writing..



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Textbook, exercise book.


<b>III. Teaching procedures:</b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...,...7B:...,………..7C……… ……., .7D……..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Write the main knowlegue of the 1st<sub> period on the BB.</sub>


- Others remark and correct.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm- up: </b>


- Introduce the lesson.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>
<b>I. The exclamations:</b>


Form : <i>What + a/ an +adj + singular N </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

- Give some examples to make clear:


<i>What a hot day </i>


<i>What nice clothes </i>
<b>II. The prepositions of place:</b>


- Ss list as many preposition as possible.


in, on, on the left >< on the right, opposite, between…


at the back of, over, above>< under…


- Ask Ss to practice with the real things in the classroom.
- Give some exercises for S to practice.


<b>III. The adverbs of frequency:</b>


- Ss list all the adverbs of frequency the have learnt:


always usually often sometimes seldom never


- Ask Ss to present the positions of them:
- before ordinary verbs:


I never go to school late.
She often watches TV late.


- after the verb “to be”:


She is always fond of action movies.


I am never fed up with playing computer game.



<b>IV.Asking and answering the time:</b>


What time is it?
What's the time?
It's + time


* Dung : o'clock
Ex: two o'clock


* Hon : past
Ex: ten past ten.


* Kem : to
Ex: ten to five


* ruoi : half
Ex: half past eight


* 1/4 : a quarter
Ex: a quarter to nine


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i> <i><b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b></i>


- Remind Ss all key points. Ngµy../../2008


- Ask ss to give the exs as much as possible


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Review all key points to prepare for the exam.



- Learn all the main knowlegue. Ngun HiỊn


………


Preparing date:../../200

Period 52: Revision



Teaching date:../../200


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson ss can do all exercises by using the revised knowlegue from the last
periods and develop the main skills especially speaking and writing.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- Text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process:</b>
<b>1. Class settlement:</b>


Attendence:……7A……… ……… …… ………, 7B .., .7C……… ……., ..7D…………


<b>2. Old lesson check:</b>


- During the lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

Play games. Lucky numbers


<b>B. Presentation:</b>



<b>Ex1. Give the correct form of verbs:</b>


1. She always………..to school at six. (go)


2. They ………the piano at present.(play)


3. We ………. TV right now (watch)


4. He is ill. I………..him tomorrow(visit)


<b>Ex2. Give the correct form of words.</b>


1. The library has over 300 million ………..(book)


2. He is very………. He always plays sports when he has freetime.(sport)


3. He is a ……… He composes a lot of songs(music)


4. Foot ball is a favorite…………..(act)


<b>Ex3. Rewrite the following sentences with the unchange meaning.</b>


1. She has less home work to do than he does.


=> He………


2. There is more noise in a city than there is in the country.


=> There is………....



3. He works more hours than she does.


=> She………


4. There are fewer girls in class 7a than there are in class 7b.


=> There are………..


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


T corrects the exs above.


<b>5. Home word:</b>


- Revise the main grammar structures .
- Prepare for the semester test.


*****************************************


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 53: Test for the 1

st

semester



Teaching date:../../2008


<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- To check up Ss’ understanding.


- To evaluate Ss after the first semester.
- To develop the presenting skill.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


Questions


<b>I. Listen and complete the sentences.</b>


1. Peter………….. in a house near the sea.


2. There are……….. bedrooms and no bathroom.


3. …………..a livingroom where there's a lovely fireplace.


4. There are………. everywhere.


5. Peter lives ……….with his dog.


<b> II. Give the correct tense of the verbs in parentheses:</b>


1. She always ... to school on weekdays. (go)


2. Now I ………what you are trying ………(understand, say)


3. She ... breakfast at the moment. (have )


4. She likes………to music in her freetime. (listen)


5. Nam is ill. I………him in the hospital. (visit)


<b> III. Give the correct form of words in the parentheses.</b>



1.There are four……… in that pop music. ( music)


2. Miss. Lien is a……….. She travels a lot. (journal)


3. My……….are Ha Anh and Tuan Sang. (child)


4. What is your……….subject? (favor)


5. Thank you for invitation. - Oh, It's my………. (please)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

1. He looks after my children when I go to work.


=> He takes………..


2. Do you enjoy playing chess?


=> Are you………?


3. VietNamese students spend nine months finishing the school year.


=> It takes……….


4. She is an excellent student.


=> What………..!


5. She has less homework to do than he does.


=> He has………



<b> V. Odd one out.</b>


1. stool room afternoon door


2. days says bays ways


3. rehearse hat hand hour


4. sunny under student lunch


5. birthday that thirteenth thing


<b> VI. Read then tick true /fasle (T/F).</b>


<i> Elizabeth works for a bank in England, but she doesn't live in England. She lives in </i>
<i>Italy. Elizabeth doesn't go to the bank every day. For two days each week she works at </i>
<i>home and she communicates with the bank by e-mail. On the other days, she travels to </i>
<i>the bank by train. But why does she live in Italy? Her parents live in Italy and she has to</i>
<i>go to work and of course they don't.</i>


1. Elizabeth lives in England.
2. She works for a bank.
3. She goes to work everyday.


4. She communicates with the bank by letter.
5. Her parents live in Italy.


<i>* New words:</i>



<i>communicate with: giao tiÕp</i>
<i>e-mail: th ®iƯn tư</i>


<b> VII. Write sentences base on the cues.</b>


1. Mr. Jim/ mechanic.


=>……….


2. I/ enjoy/listen/music.


=>……….


3. She/has/more milk in her glass/ he.


=>………


4. I/like/English/best.


=>………


<b>VIII. Choose the best answers :</b>


1. 4.45 is said:


A. It’s four forty five B. It’s a quarter to four C. It’s a quarter past four.


2. We often do experiments in ... class.


A. Math. B. English C. Physics.



3. We ... go to school on Sundays.


A. always B. never C. often


4. She is ... than Hoa.


A. nice B. the nicer C. nicer


5. What ... interesting stories 


A. x B. a C. an


<i><b>III. Teaching process:</b></i>
<b>1. Class settlement:</b>


Attendence:…..7A…… …….., ..7B……… ………… …… ……, 7C .., ..7D………..


<b>2. Old lesson check:</b>


- Check ss' preparation for the test.


<b>3. Deliver the test copies </b> <b> to ss.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b>4. Collect ss' finished tests</b>


- T remark the test period.


<b>5. Home work:</b>



- Prepare for the next lesson.


<i><b>***************************************</b></i>


Preparing date:../../2008

Period 54. Test correction



Teaching date:../../2008


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


After the lesson ss can eluavate how much they have gained in their tests, encourage
them learn English more as much as they can.


<i><b>II. Preparation:</b></i>


The marked tests.


<i><b>III. Teaching process:</b></i>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Attendence :……7A……… ……… …… ……… …… ………, 7B .., 7C .., .7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


No check.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>


<i><b>Keys and marks</b></i>
<b>I. 1,5 points (0,3x5)</b>



1. lives
2. two
3. there's
4. flowers
5. alone


<i> Tapetranscripe:</i>


<i>Peter lives in a house near the sea. It's an old and small house. There are two </i>
<i>bedrooms and no bathroom. There 's a livingroom where there's a lovely fireplace.The </i>
<i>garden goes down to the sea and in summer there are flowers everywhere.Peter lives </i>
<i>alone with his dog, Boxer, but they have a lot of visitors.</i>


<b>II.1point (0,2x5)</b>


1. goes


2. understand, to say
3. is having


4. listening
5. will visit


<b>III. 1point (0,2x5)</b>


1. musician
2. jounalist
3. children
4. favorite


5. pleasure


<b>IV. 1,5points (0,3x5)</b>


1. He takes care of my children when I go to work.
2. Are you interested in playing chess?


3. It takes VNamese students nine months to finish the school year.
4. What an excelent student!


5. He has less home work to do than she does.


<b>V. 1point (0,2x5)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

5. that


<b>VI. 1,5points (0,3x5)</b>


1. F
2. T
3. F
4. F
5. T


<b>VII. 1 point (0,25x4)</b>


1. Mr. Jim is a mechanic.
2. I like listening to music.


3. She has more milk in her glass than he does.


4. I like English best.


<b>VIII. 1,5 points (0,3x5)</b>


1. A
2. C
3. B


4. C <b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


5. A <i><b>Ngµy../../2008</b></i>


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


T checks whether ss redo the tests.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


Prepare for the next lesson. NguyÔn HiÒn


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 55.Unit 9 : At home and away.</b>


Teaching date:../../2009 <b>Lesson 1: A. A holiday in Nha trang (A1)/P86</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquanted with the simple past form,ask and
answer about one's holiday.


-To develop the main skills especially speaking and listening.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape + casstte player, text book.
- Ss: Textbook, workbook, new lesson.


<b>III. Teaching procedures. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B...7C...7D……….


<i><b>2. Odl lesson check. </b></i>


Answer ss the questions :


<i>- What do you remember most in the first semester ?</i>
<i>- In which subject do you get the highest score ?</i>
<i>- What are you going to do in this semester ?</i>
<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>


A. Warm up.


Answer the questions:


<i>+ What do you always do in summer ?</i>
<i>+ Do you like traveling ?</i>


<i>+ Do you know which places are famous ?</i>
<b>B. Presentation</b>



Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Hang the picture of Nha trang and
introduce the topic of the lesson .


- Ask Ss to listen and answer the question:
What did they do there ?


- Play the tape the first time .


- Introduce the new words and the simple
past form.


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.</b>


- Ss listen


- Ss listen and answer T' questions
- Ss listen to the tape


<b>1. New words: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

-Play the tape twice again and ask the Ss to
do the exercise.


<b>- </b>Ask the Ss toread the answer .


- Teacher correct if necessary.


- Ask the Ss to role play the dialogue


and talk about the vacation.


- recent
- wonderful.


- aquarium.


- most.


<b>2.The simple past tense:</b>


<b>a, Uses</b>: Diễn tả những hành động đã xảy ra
tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ .


<b>b, Form</b> :


* §éng tõ “ to be “


( + ) I, he, she, it + was + O
we ,you ,they + were + O.
( -) I, he, she ,it, + was not + O
we , you, they + were + not + O
( ? ) Was + I, he ,she , it + O ?
Were + we , you they + O?
Answer: Yes, S + was/ were .


No, S + was not / were not.
* §éng tõ thêng .


( +) S + Vqk + O.



( - ) S + did not + V + O.
( ?) Did + S + V + O ?
Yes , S + did .
No, S + didn't.


<b>c,Adverbs:</b> Yesterday, last month / week/
year, ago, in.


<b>d,Pronunciation:</b>


<i><b> -</b></i> /t/: những động từ kết thúc là: k, p, f,
s, ch, sh, x, th: walked, Laughed, stopped,
washed, watched, fixed, buzzed.


- / id/: tËn cïng /t,d<i>/ : </i>started, needed.


- /d/: các động từ còn lại


<i><b>e, Irregular verbs:</b></i>


- buy- bought
- come- came
- get- got


- Ss listen and do exercise
- Ss read their answers.


<b>3. Answer. Number the sentenses.</b>
<i>1. Liz went to Nhatrang.</i>



<i>2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium</i>
<i>3. Liz bought souvenirs.</i>


<i>4. Liz return to Ha noi.</i>


<i> 5. Liz talked about her vacation</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation </b></i>


- Retell the main content of the simple past form.
- Give some examples.


<i><b>5. Home work. </b></i>


- Do exercise 1.2 page 53 in workbook.
- Learn by heart the simple past tense.
- Prepare for the next lesson: A2- Unit 9.


**************************************


Preparing date../../

2009

<b>Period 56. Unit 9 : At home and away.</b>


Teaching date:../../2009 <b>Lesson 2: A holiday in Nha trang (A2)/P87</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the simple past form, retell the
story about the holiday by using the words: saw, ate, sharks, dolphins, turtles...
- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>



- T: Tape + casstte player, text book, work sheet.
- Ss: Old lesson, textbook, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B……...7C………..7D...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check. </b></i>


- Do exercise 1.2 (p53 ) in workbook .


- Repeat the main form of the simple past tense and give the examples


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>


<b>A. Warm up</b>: Matching game.


A B.
1. visit a. ate
2. talk b. looked
3. go c. visited
4. look d. went.
5. arrive e. talked
6. eat f. arrived
-Call some pairs to read the answer .


- Check if necessary .
+ The answer:



<b> 1-c, 2-e . 3- d, 4-b, 5-f, 6-a,.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


<b>- </b>Introduce the lesson , give some


questions


- Introduce the new words :


- Read the new words in chorus, then ask
some ss to repeat


<b> </b>


<b>- </b>Play the tape twice, and ask the Ss to


read the text in silence to find out the
content of the reading .


- Ask the Ss to read the text aloud.
- Read the answer in pairs aloud .
- Ask ss to answer, then remark.


- Check the answer if necessary.


- Play the tape once more time to check
again.


<b>A2. Listen and read. Then answer the </b>


<b>questions</b>


- Listen to answer T' questions


<i> ? How was Liz s vacation ?</i>’


<i> ? What did she think of Nha trang ?</i>
<i> ? What places did she visit ?</i>


<i>* New words:</i>


<i>- Shark: c¸ mËp </i>
<i>- Dolphin : cá voi</i>


<i>- Different kind of : Nhiều loại kh¸c nhau.</i>
<i>- Exist : lèi ra</i>


<i>- Buy - bought : mua b¸n </i>
<i>- Wear - Wore : mang ,®eo</i>


<i>- Poster : tranh ¶nh </i>
<i>- Crab: con cua </i>


- <i>Instead : thay vào đó.</i>


- Ss read and find the content of the text
- Ss read the text in pairs and find the
content of each question, and answer.
* <b>Answers.</b>



<i>a.Her parents went to the aquarium with </i>
<i>her </i>


<i>b. They saw sharks , dolphins, turtles , and</i>
<i>many types of fish</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>- </b>Ask the Ss to read the text again , and
look at the picture to retell the story of liz
‘s family.


- Aks the Ss to retell the story in front the
class.


- Check if necessary.


* Now tell the story of Liz's trip to Tri
Nguyen Aquarium.


- Ss work in pairs.


- Some perform before the class


<i> a. The Robisons went to the Aquarium.</i>
<i>b. They saw sharks , dolphins , turtles </i>
<i>and many colour fish.</i>


<i>c. There was a sourvenirs shop near the </i>
<i>exsit bof the aquarium.</i>


<i>d. Mr Robinsons bought a cap and a </i>


<i>poter .After that , they went to the </i>
<i>foodstall</i> <i>to eat crap and noodles</i>
<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Retell the main content of the text.
- Repeat some active words.


<i><b>5. Home work. </b></i>


- Do exercise 3-4 on page 54 in workbook.


- Learn new words by heart.


- Sum up the main content of the text.


******************************


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 57. Unit 9 : At home and away</b>


Teaching date:../../2009 <b> Lesson 3: A holiday in Nha trang (A3-4)/P89</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the simple past form,retell the story


about the holiday by using the words talk , rent, move, saw…


-To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



- T: Tape <b>+ </b>casstte player, text book, work sheet.


- Ss: Old lesson, textbook, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B...7C...7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check. </b></i>


- Do exercise 3-4(p54 ) in workbook .
- Retell the story.


- Write the new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i> <i><b> </b></i>buy saw


<b>A.</b> Wam up.


Play game: Slap the board:


bought irregular verbs think
told
thought


<b>B.</b> Presentation.


Teacher's activities Students' activities



Introduce the listening , and ask the Ss to


<b>A3.Listen. Write the letter of the </b>
<b>sentences you hear.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

work in pairs to choose the sentences
which contain the similar information to
the tape.


- Play the tape three times , and ask the Ss
to share the answer .


- Ask some pairs to read the correct answer
- Correct if necessary.


- Introduce the reading, and ask some
questions :


-Ask the Ss to read the reading in silence
and answer the question that contain the
Content of the reading .


- Ask the Ss to do the exercise in the book
(P: 90)


- Work in pairs to do the exercise., and ask
the Ss to read aloud the answer.


- Check the answer if necessary.



- Ask the Ss to read the reading aloud .
- Explain the difficult words:




- Ask the Ss to write their own diary ( in 5
minutes ).


- Ask the Ss to read the diary aloud.
- Check the writing .


- Play the tape and the Ss to repeat the tape.


- Ss listen and compare their answers with
their partners.


- Ss read the correct ones.


<i>b. The Robinson return to Hanoi by bus .</i>
<i>d. This was the first time Liz saw the </i>
<i>paddies.</i>


<i>e. They stopped at the restaurant for the </i>
<i>short time .</i>


<i>h. Mrs Robinson bought some food for Liz.</i>
<i>j. They arrive home in the evening</i>


<b>A4. Read Ba' diary.</b>



-<i>Do you write diary ?</i>


<i>- What do you always write in your diary ?</i>
<i>- When did Liz and her parents arrrive in </i>
<i>Hanoi ?</i>


<i>- What does Mr Robinson do ?</i>
<i> -How old is Liz ?</i>


<i>- What does Ba collect ?</i>


<i> a. Liz lived next door to Ba. ( not long </i>
<i>away )</i>


<i> b. Liz learnt Vietnamese in Vietnam ( not </i>
<i>in the USA.)</i>


<i> c. Ba collects stamps . ( not Liz ) </i>
<i> d. Liz s aunt lives </i>’ <i><b>in Newyork ( not in </b></i>
<i>Vietnam)</i>


<i> e. The Robinson moved . Now Ba is sad.</i>
<i><b>( not happy )</b></i>


<i> f. Ba will see Liz nezt week ,( not never )</i>


* New words:


+ Keep in touch: giữ liên lạc


+ Improve : c¶i thiƯn


+ on the other side of:


+ talk - talked
+ Arrive- Arrived


+ Rent- Rented
+ Move- moved .


- Ss read their dairy.


- Ss listen to the tape and repeat.


<i><b>4. Consolidation </b></i>


- Retell the main content of the reading.
- Give the past form of learnt words.


<i><b>5. Home work.</b></i>


- Do exercise 4 page 54 in the work book .
- Learn by heart a part of the reading.


- Prepare B1 Neighbors. Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 58. Unit 9 : At home and away</b>

.



Teaching date../../2009 <b>Lesson 4: B. Neighbors (B1,2)/P92</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the simple past form, and some
other situations, revive the exclaimation sentence with ''What''


-To develop the main skills especially speaking and listening, reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- Tape + cassette player, text book , work sheet.
- Old lesson, textbook, exercisebook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date:...7A...7B...7C...7D…………


<i><b>2. Oral lesson check. </b></i>


- Do exercise 4(p 54) in workbook .


- Write new words, read and give the meaning.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A Warm up</b> .


- Play guessing game :


Ask each student to write the thing he/ she did . And ask them to guess each other . The
winner pair is the pair guess the true thing.



<b>B. Presentation. </b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
them to guess


- Introduce the topic of the lesson.
- Ask the Ss to listen to the tape ( book
closed ) and answer :


- Play the tape twice .


- Ask the Ss to answer the question
( Book opened ).


- Ask the Ss to role play the dialogue .
- Give the new words and the


exclaimations.


- Ask the Ss to make examples.


<i> What a nice dress !</i>
<i> What a clever woman !</i>
<i> What a nice neighbor!</i>


- Ask the Ss to read the new words in
chorus.



- Aks the Ss to read the dialogue in pairs
aloud


-Ask the Ss to answer the questions
( work in pairs ).


- Read the answer a loud.


Introduce the short answer:


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Ss look at the picture and answer the
question


<i> What are the girls doing ?</i>


- Ss listen to the tape and guess the
answer


<i>What are Lan and Hoa talking </i>
<i>about ?</i>


- Ss listen and answer with their books, T
corrects if necessary.


- Read in pairs before the class.
* New words:



- cut => cut: cắt


- hairdresser: thợ làm tóc nữ
- material: v, chÊt liƯu
- make => made: lµm , may
- clever: thông minh, nhanh nhẹn
- dressmaker: thợ may váy


* Structure:


<i><b>What + a / an + adj + singular N! </b></i>
<i><b>What + adj + plural N !</b></i>


- Read the newwords in chorus.
- Read the dialogue in pairs


- Practice answering the questions in
pairs


- Read aloud their answers.


<i>a. She is a hairdresser. </i>
<i>b. She is a dressmaker</i>
<b>B2. Answer. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to practice
asking and answer the questions ( p93 )
-Ask some pairs to read the answer in
front the rest.



- Correct if necessary.


- Play answer the questions quickly:
using the short answer:


- Step1: Ask Ss to write 5 sentences in a
peace of paper.


- Step 2: The header collect all the papers.
- Step 3: the header takes one of the paper
and give the S to see through.


- Step 4 : The header asks the yes- no
questions about the things' student.


+ Who answer correctly and quickly will
be the winner.


<i>Yes, he / she did.</i>


<i> No, he / she didn t.</i>’


- Answer the questions on P93.


- Some pairs read their answers before
the class.


<i>a. No, she didn t.</i>’



<i>b. No, she didn t</i>’


<i> c. Yes, she did</i>


- Answer the T' questions quickly
- <i>I did homework yesterday</i>
- <i>I drank orange juice.</i>
- <i>I went to the zoo.</i>
- <i>I bought a new pen</i>
<i> - I wore new clothes</i>


- Ss do as the same what T says and
practice playing.


<b>4. Consolidation </b>


- Retell the content of the lesson.


- Sum up the main content of the dialogue in English.


<i><b>5 Home work. </b></i>


- Do ex B 1-2 p55 in exercisebook.
- Learn newwords and B1 by heart.
- Prepare the new lesson B3.


************************************


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 59. Unit 9 : At home and away</b>



Teaching date:../../2009 <b>Lesson 5: B. Neighbors (B3-4)/P93</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the simple past form, and the new
topic ( the neighbor ) .


-To develop the main skills especially speaking and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- Text book, workbook, teaching plan, work sheet.
- Old lesson, textbook, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B………7C...7D...


<i><b>2. Oral lesson check. </b></i>


- Do exercise b1-2 (p56 ) in workbook .
- Read the dialogue by heart.


- Write the new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up</b> .


- Ask Ss to write 5 sentences by using the exclamation sentence.


- Correct if the group has the best sentences will be the winner.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask the Ss to answer the questions: <b>B3. Read. Then answer.</b>- Answer the questions below


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- Introduce the topic of the lesson.


- Ask the Ss to read the reading in silence.
- Ask the Ss to read the text and answer the
questions.


- Ask the Ss to write the answers.
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud


- Check if necessary .
- Introduce the new words:


- Ask the Ss to read the new words in
chorus. And write the new words down in
the note book.


- Ask the Ss to read the text in front the
rest


- Check the spelling if necessary .
- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to dicuss
talking about the neighbor ( base on the
following questions:



- Ask some Ss to speak in front of the
class.


- Ask their friends to retell again.


- Introduce the exercise'order and some
new words.


- Ask the Ss to give the form and the use
of the past form.


Ex:- I was at home yesterday.


- I played soccer yesterday afternoon
- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to do the
exercise.


- Ask the Ss to read the answer .
- Check if necessary.


+ What do you like to do most in Home
Economics ? ( sewing , knitting , cooking )
- Read the text in silent.


- Read and answer the questions in pairs
- Practice asking and answering in pairs


<b>* Answers:</b>



a. She learn how to use a sewing machine .
b. She made a cushion for her armchair
first.


c. It was blue and white.
d. Next, she made a skirt.


e. It was green with white flowers on it .
f. It looked very pretty.


g. She tried it on but it didn’t fit .
h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her.
i. Finally , it fitted very well.


<b>* New words:</b>


- Sewing: công việc may vá
- Hobby: së thÝch


- Sewing machine : máy khâu.
- Cushion : tấm đệm gối
- Fit : vừa hợp


- Learn how to + V: học làm gì
- Read the new words aloud and write in
their notes.


- Read the text sentence by sentence aloud.
- Note the spelling.



- Discuss in pairs to talk about their
neighbors base on the questions below:


What is her / his name ?
How old is he / she /


What does she / he do ?
What is she / he good at ?


- Practice talking about their neghbors
aloud.


- Others retell what their friends talked.


<b>B4. Write. Put the verds in brackets in </b>
<b>the simlpe past tense.</b>


<b>* New word:</b>


- Decide + to V (smth): quyết định làm
gì đó


- hobby: së thÝch
- cushion: tÊm th¶m
- finally: cuèi cïng


<b>* The form:</b>


( +) S+ V +ed + O.



( - ) S + Did + not + V-infi + O
( ? ) Did + S + V- infi + O ?
- Do in pairs .


- Read their answers, others correct.


<b>* Answers:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

made, was, wasn’t, helped, fitted


<i><b>4. Consolidation </b></i>


-Ask the Ss to retell the reading.


<i><b>5.Home work.</b></i>


- Read the text and newwords by heart.
- Do exercise 3 on p56 in workbook.


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 60. Language focus 3</b>


Teaching date:../../2009


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the simple past form. And do the
exercise in the text book.


-To develop the main skills especially speaking, reading and writing skills.



<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet, teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date:...7A...7B...7C...7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check. </b></i>


- Do ex4 (p57 ) in workbook .


- Read and answer the questions.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up. </b>


<b> - Give the past form of the verbs</b>:


<i>Verbs </i> <i> - Past form </i> <i> Verbs </i> <i>- Past form</i>


Buy ... help ...


Remember ... take ...


Send ... think ...


Talk ... play ...



Work ... write ...


- Ask the Ss to read aloud the words.


<b>B.Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask the Ss to repeat the simple past form.
- Ask them to give the examples


- Ask them to give the way to ask the price.
- Ask ss to givethe way to ask and answer
the distance


- Ask for the way.


<i> </i>


- Ask the Ss to work in pair to do the
exercise in the book.


- Ask some pairs to read aloud the answer:
- Check if necessary.


<b>I. Theory</b>


1. The past tense.



Form: (+)<b> S + V( ed) + O.</b>


<b> (- ) S + didn't + V.</b>
<b> (?) Did + S + V ?</b>


Ex: I bought a cap yesterday.
2. Hái và trả lời về giá.


How much is/are ...?
How much do/does + N cost ?
3. Ask for the distance:


How far is it from ...to...?
4. Ask the way to some where


Can /could you please tell me the way
to ...?


<b>II. Exercises.</b>


<b>Ex1: How much is it?</b>


- Ss read their answers aloud.
Mai<i> : How much is the blue hat?</i>


Assistant<i>: Its 15000dong</i>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- Introduce the exercise


- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to practice


asking and asnwer about the preposition .
using the words in the box.


- Read the words in the box.


<b>- </b>Work in pairs to do the exercise.


- Read the answer aloud .


- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to read te
sentences


- Check if neccessary.
- More, less, fewer.


Assistant:<i> It s 12.000 </i>’ dong


<b>Ex2. Preposition.</b>


- Do ex orally


a. The shoe store is on Hai ba trung street.
It’s next to the cloting store.


- The book store is on Hue street. It’s
between the restaurant and the minimart.
- The restaurant is on Hue street. It’s next
to book store to the left.


b. How far is it from the clothing store to


the book store ?


It’s 450 meters


<b>Ex3. Past simple tense </b>


- I <b>played</b> volleyball last week.


- Yesterday, I <b>talked </b>to my grand


mother.


- Last December. Mom <b>bought</b> me a


new bike.


- Dad <b>worked</b> in Hue a few years ago.


- I <b>sen</b>t a letter to my penpal last


month.


<b>Ex4. Simple tenses</b>


- Help my mom
- Study English
- Clean my room
- Watch T V.


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>



- Retell the main content of the lesson.
- Repeat the main knowlegue of the lesson.


<i><b> 5. Home work:</b></i>


- Learn by heart the grammar and structures.


- Do <b>Test yourself</b> in workbook.


- Prepare for the next lesson. Ngµy../../2009


Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


Ngun HiỊn


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 61. unit 10. health and hygiene </b>


Teaching date../../2009 <b>Lesson 1. A Personal hygiene. (A1,2)/P99</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to revive the simple present tense + the simple past. Ss
will get acquainted with the new topic : Personal hygiene.


-To develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Text book, teaching plan, workbook.


- Ss: Old lesson, text book, workbook


<b>III. Teaching process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B...7C...7D………..


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do exercise in workbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

- Ask Ss to make new sentences , using the past form of the verbs:


Take - made - tea - borrow


Think - buy - help - decide.


- Check if necessary.


<b>B. Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to answer the questions about
Hoa.


- Introduce the text


- Ask Ss to scan the reading and give the
content of the reading.



- Ask Ss to write down the new words and
ask Ss to read the new words in chorus.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the text
again and answer the quetions (p100) in
text book.


- Write the answers on the BB.


- Ask Ss to read the text aloud.
- Correct the Ss’ pronunciation.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to dicuss saying
about the things they often do to keep the
body healthy with the guided questions




<b>- </b>Introduce the listening and aks Ss to work


<b>A1. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>


- Read then answer the questions about
Hoa in pairs.


a.Where does Hoa come from?
b.Which school does she study in ?
c. Where does she live now ?
d. Who does she live with ?


e. Where do her parents live ?


- Read the text, and find the content of it.
- Write new words and read them in chorus
* New words:


- person (n)/personal (a): thuộc về cá nhân
- hygiene (n): vệ sinh


- iron (v): là, ủi q.áo


- Take/do morning exercise : TËp thĨ dơc
bi s¸ng.


- Get up early<i>: dËy sím</i>


- Stay up late : <i>thøc khuya</i>


<i> - </i>Take care of oneself: <i>tự quan tõm n </i>


<i>bản thân.</i>


- Dont eat too much candy: <i>không ăn </i>


<i>qúa nhiều kẹo.</i>


- Read the text in pairs and answer the
questions


- Write the anwers on the BB



a. They are busy because it is nearly harvest
time.


b. Hoa's grand father helps them on the farm.
c. They will go to Hanoi soon, after the harvest.
d. Now Hoa is different . She gets up early and
does morning exercises everyday.


e. Hoa's mother wants her to : do her own
washing and ironing .


f. Hoa's mother doesn't want her to eat too
much candy.


- Read the text aloud


- Discuss the way to keep their body
healthy base on the guided questions:


+ What do you often do in the morning /
afternoon / evening?


+ Do you brush your teeth in the morning / in
the evening?


+ What do you do to protect your health?


<b>A2. Listen</b>.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

in pairs to guess what Hoa doing


- Introduce some new words, check their
guessing and give the meaning of the
difficult words.


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and
arrange the pictures.


- Ask Ss to share the answer with their
partners.


- Ask Ss to give the correct answer and
write it down.


- Ask Ss to read aloud the answers and the
new words.


- Ask Ss to tell about the activities that
they do everyday in pairs


* New words:
- Comb hair.
- Put on clothes.
- Polish her shoes.
- Change clothes


- Wash and iron clothes.


- Listen and arrange the pictures in order


- Compare their answers with their partner
- Give the right answers:


<b> A, e, f, d, g, c, h, b.</b>


- Discuss what they do everyday
+ Get up.


+ brush teeth.
+ change clothes


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Retell the content of the lesson.
- Repeat the new words


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exA1,2 in workbook.
- Learn newwords by heart.
- Prapare for the next lesson.


**********************************


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 62. unit 10: Health and hygiene</b>.


Teaching date../../2009 <b> Lesson 2 : A. Personal hygiene (A3,4)/P101</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>



After the lesson Ss will be able to revive the new topic : Personal hygiene and daily
activities ex: brush one’s teeth, have breakfast/ lunch/ dinner, wash and iron clothes
-To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book, workbook.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement.</b></i>


Date: ...7A...7B...7C...7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check.</b></i>


- Do exA1,2 in workbook on p61.


- Write newwords, read and give the meaning.
- Read and answer T' questions about Hoa.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>


A. <b>Warm up: Matching</b>:


1. Receive a. KÑo


2. Get up . b. Là quần áo
3. Iron. c. NhËn.
4. Candy d. Ngñ dËy.



- Ask Ss to give the correct answer .


- Read the words in pairs.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

- Ask Ss to read aloud the text and practice
talking about Nam's daily routines.


- Introduce the text and ask Ss to work in
pairs to read the text.


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to write about their dairy based on


Nam dairy.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice aksing
and answering .


- Check the mistake if necessary.


- Introduce the reading and ask Ss to retell
again the things that Hoa’s mother


reminded her in the last period.


-Ask Ss to write down and read aloud the
sentences they list.



- Ask Ss to read the letter that Hoa wrote to
her mother, and then fill in the blanks.
- Compare the answer with the partners
and write down the answers on BB then
read the answers aloud.


- Check if necessary.


-Introduce the way to write a letter.


- Ask Ss to read the completed letter.
- Ask Ss to close the book and list the
things that Hoa does and Hoa doesn’t do,
then, ask Ss to write down and read aloud
the things they list.


- Ask Ss to write the full sentences with
the phrases


<b>A3. Read Nam' dairy</b>


- Read and talk about Nam' s diary


What time does Nam do at 6.30 ?


- Read the text in pairs


He gets up at 6.30.


- Write their own diary base on Nam's


diary


- Aks and answer about themselves


What time do you get up?


What do you do at 6.30 ?


+ 6.30: get up/ 6.45: have breakfast.
+ 7.00: go to school/11.00: have lunch.
+ 12.00: take a rest/4.00: play scocer.
+ 4.30: cook dinner/7.00: do homework.


<b>A4. Write. Cmplete Hoa's reply to her </b>
<b>mother with suitable verbs</b>


- Repeat the things Hoa do in the last
period


- Write and read the sentences they wrote
+ Get up early.


+ Wash and iron clothes.
+ Don’t eat too much candy.
+ Brush teeth twice a day.


- Read the letter and fill in the blanks
- Compare their answers with their partners


then write on the BB and read<i><b> </b></i>



1. was. 7. wash.
2. having. 8. iron.
3. show. 9. eating.
4. take. 10. told.
5. get. 11. see.


6. go 12. go.<b> </b>


<b>- </b>Give the ways to write a letter


+ Name of the sender, date, month.


+ Salutation<b>:</b> Dear...,


+ Complementary close: love, lost of love,
with much love, your loving daughter/son,
with all my love.


- Practice writing a letter then read it aloud
- List the things Hoa does and doesn't do,
then read them aloud


+ Get up early/ take morning exercise.
+ go to bed early/ play volleyball.
+ clean room/ wash clothes.
+ eat breakfast.


- Write the full sentences
I get up early everyday.



I always do morning exercise.
I never go to bed early.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<i><b>5. Home work: </b></i>


- Ask Ss to do ex3,4 in workbook on p62.
- Write about their partner's daily activities.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


**********************************


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 63. unit 10: Health and hygiene</b>.


Teaching date../../2009 <b> Lesson 3 : B. A bad toothache (B1)/ P103</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to practice asking and answering the questions about the
tooth with the words: fill cavity, fix one’s tooth, scared, hurt...


-To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet, teaching plan, tape and cassette
- Ss: Old lesson, textbook, workbook.



<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D………


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do exA3,4 in workbook on the BB.
- Read their writing about their partner.


<i><b> 3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up .</b>


-Ask Ss to do the matching the line in column A with the line in column B.


<b>A </b> <b>B. </b>


1. Some people do physical exercise. a. to have the tooth out.


2<b>. </b>It’s a good idea to see the dentist. b. to keep fit and loose weight.


3. The nurse gave Mike two aspirins. c. to keep them healthy.


4. Mary took two sleeping pills. d. to take him to hospital.


5. We need to call a taxi. e. to help her sleep.


6. Brush your teeth after meals. f. to make his headache less.


- Ask Ss to write down the answer , and read the answers in pairs.



<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Hang the picture and introduce the
situation.


- Ask Ss to answer the questions:


- Introduce the dialogue, play the tape and
ask Ss to listen to the tape.


-Introduce the new words :


-Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus.


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Listen to the T' introduction
- Answer the questions


+ What is the matter with the boy
in the picture ?


+ What do you do if you have a
headache ?


- Listen to the tape



- Give the new words and their meanings
* New words:


- Have an appointment : cã hÑn
- To be scare of: sợ


- Drill: cái khoan
- Fill a cavity: hàn răng.


- Hurt: đau.


- Fix ones tooth : Sửa, chữa răng.
- toothache/ have a toothache: đau răng/ bị


đau răng


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

-Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs then
answer the questions in the text book


- Ask them to compare their keys with their
partners


-Write down the answers on the BB, others
answer inturn the questions.


-Check the answers if necessary.


- Ask Ss to role play the dialogue in pairs
- Ask Ss to practice asking answering


about you.


ss by ss.


- Read the dialogue in pairs then answer
the questions


- Compare with their partners.


- Write the answers on the BB, others
repeat inturn


<i>a) Minh has a toothache.</i>


<i>b) No, he doesn t, the loudness of the drill</i>’


<i>scares him.</i>


<i> c) Because she had a toothache.</i>
<i> d) She filled the cavity in her teeth.</i>


- Practice in pairs to read the dialogue
- Answer the questions about themselves


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Retell the main content of the dialogue.
- Repeat the new words and remember them.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>



- Learn new words and dialogue by heart.


- Study the lesson and do exB1 in work book P63. Ngµy… …./ ./2009


- Prepare the new lesson. Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


NguyÔn HiÒn


Preparing date../../2009 <b>Period 64. Unit 10 : Health and hygiene</b>.


Teaching date../../2009

<b>Lesson 4 : B. A bad toothache (B2,3)/P104</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the personal hygience, and practice
asking and answering the questions about the tooth with the words: look after, give
advice.


-To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book, work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<b> 1. Class settlement:</b>


- Date :...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………



<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do exB1 in work book on p63 .


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up</b>.


- Ask Ss to play the Hang man with the words relate to the tooth and toothache .


Toothache. Dentist. Cavity. Brush teeth. scared hurt


- Ask some pairs to go to the BB to play.


<b> B.</b> Presentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to play the matching.


<b>B2. Listen and answer.</b>


- Match column A with the column B
A B
1. Matter a. hàn răng.
2. Toothache b. cuéc hÑn
3. Appoinment c. sỵ



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

-Ask Ss to retell the story about Minh:


<b>- </b>Introduce the listening and ask Ss to


guess what the dentist is like


-Play the tape the first time, and ask Ss
to find the answer.


-Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and
answer the questions in the text book.
-Call some pairs answer in front of the
class.


- Play the tape the last time to check
their answers.


- Introduce some new words:


- Ask Ss to read the new words in
chorus.


- Ask Ss to find the information about
Dr. Lai and Minh.


- Introduce the lesson, and ask Ss to
read the reading .


- After reading the text, ask Ss to


complete the story.


- Write the answers and read the
answers aloud


5. Scare e. nha sÜ
6. Dentist f. ®au răng
7. Kind. g. tư tÕ, tèt bơng.
=> 1- d, 2- f, 3- b, 4- a, 5- c, 6- e, 7- g.
- Retell the story about Minh:


Minh has a toothache. He has
appointment with the dentist. But he was
scared. Hoa advised him not to worry because
the dentist was kind...


- Listen to T' introduction and guess what the
dentist is like


- Listen to the tape and answer


- Listen again and answer the questions,
compare with their partners in pairs.


- Some pairs answer before the class, others
remark.


<b>* Answer:</b>


a.) Dr Lai is a dentist.



b.) She wears uniform to work


c.) Most children feels scaredwhen they come
to see Dr Lai.


d.) She explains What will happen. She give
them advice. She tells them how to look
after their teeth, and she reminds them to


clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly<i>.</i>


- Listen again to check their answers.


<b>* New words:</b>


<i>Remind sb to V sth:</i> nhắc nhở ai đó làm gì


<i>Clean teeth regularly</i>: đánh răng thờng xuyên


<i> Eat sensibly</i> : ăn uống hợp lý
- Repeat the new words in chorus


<b>B3. Listen and read.</b>


<b>- </b>Find information about Dr. Lai And Minh


<b>Find the person who</b> <b>Dr Lai</b> <b>Minh</b>


Is kind and helpful x



Has a toothache x


Is scare of seeing Dr.


Lai x


Looks after teeth x


Hates the sound of


the drill. x


Has to visit the
dentist.


x
- Listen to the introduction of the text
- Read and complete the table


- Write the answers and read them aloud in
pairs


Minh is very <b>nervous</b> and Dr. Lai notices this.


She <b>smiles</b> at Minh and tells him not to worry.


She explains one of his teeth has a <b>cavity</b>. He


has to <b>brush</b> them regulary. After Dr Lai fills



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

-Ask Ss to work in group of three to
read the text.


- Elicit the new words from ss


- Read the text in groups of three
- Give the new words:


* New words:


- surgery (n): phßng phÉu tht
- check (v): kiĨm tra


- smile (v): mỉm cời
- notice (v): thông báo


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


- Repeat the new words


- Revive the content of the listening.


<i><b>5 Home work:</b></i>


- Do exB2 in work book p64


- Learn new words and structures by heart.
- Prepare for the next lesson.



<i><b>**************************************</b></i>


Preparing date: ../../2009 <b>Period 65. Unit 10 : Health and hygiene</b>.


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b>Lesson 5: B. A bad toothache (B4,5)/P105.</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know to take care of theirteeth better and practice
asking and answering the questions about the tooth, toothacheand the way to keep our
teeth health.


-To develop the main skills especially reading skill.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet, teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<b> 1. Class settlement:</b>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C……….7D…………


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do exB4 in work book on p64


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.
- Read the text and answer T' questions



<i><b> 3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to retell something about Dr Lai.


- Others listen and give more details if necessary.
B. Presentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at ex4 on p 105 to practice
asking and answering the questions.


- Ask ss to give the new words
- Guide the way to do the ex


<b>B4. Ask and answer questions with a </b>
<b>partner. Use the words to help you</b>


- Practice asking and answering the
questions using the given words
- New words:


- serious (a): nghiªm träng


? Why…?


- Because…



- Make some example


Ex: Why do you learn E ?
Because I like it best


a) Minh is nervous. Why ?


Because he’s seeing the dentist
b) The cavity is not serious. Why?


Because it’s very small.
c) Minh looks worried. Why?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

-Check if necessary.


- Ask ss to give the ways to keep teeth
healthy


- T helps if necessary.


- T elicits new words from ss by asking
give the words and read a loud after T.


- Ask Ss to work in groups to list the things
they should & shouldn't do to protect their
teeth healthy.


- T helps if necessary then call some
groups to present.



his teeth.


d) Minh is very happy. Why?
Because his teeth are OK.


<b>B5. Write. Complete this poster with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Give the ways to keep teethe healthy
Ex:


* - We should brush our teeth at least
two times a day after the meals.


- We should often go to see the
dentist .


- We should eat sensibly.
*- We shouldn't eat too much
sugerthings such as: candies, cakes, etc
- We shouldn't use an old


toothbrush.


<b>B6. Play with words:</b>


- Give the new words:


- sensible(a)=> sensibly(adv)
- eat sensibly: ăn uống điều độ


- touch (v): sờ, động chạm


- health(n) => healthy(a): khoẻ mạnh
unhealthy(a) : không tốt/ khoẻ
- neglect(v): lê, bá qua


- be in a lot of pain: bị đau
- have a toothache: bị đau răng


- have a stomachache: bị đau bụng/dạ dày
- have a cold: bị cảmcúm


- have an appointment: hn gp ai đó
- Give the ways to protect their teeth
healthy.


- Some groups present their ideas


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Repeat the ways to keep teeth healthy.


<b> 5. Home work:</b>


- Do exB3,4 in work book.


<i> - </i>Ask Ss to do the exercise.


Choose the best word in the bracket.



1) Dr Lai looks ( after/ for / up ) all the students teeth.‘


2) Our teacher reminded us ( for / to / about ) do all the home work.


3) Most of the children are ( scared/ scare / scaring ) when they go to the dentist.
4) My mother always give me some ( advise/ advice/ advising)


<i><b>****************************************</b></i>


Preparing date:../../2009<b> Period 66. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy</b>


Teaching date:../../2009

<b>Lesson 1: A. A check up (A1)/P107</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

and learn the new structure : Would you + V...?; need to + V
-To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<b> 1. Class settlement:</b>


- Date :...7A:...7B:...7C……….7D………..


<i><b> 2. Old lesson check:</b></i>



<b> 15 minute- test</b>



<i><b>* Give the correct form of verbs using the past form:</b></i>


1. Lan( make) a skirt yesterday. => made
2. She (leave) here ten minutes ago. => left


3. They (buy) Liz a cap in the shop near the exit of the aquarium. => bought
4. Dr lai (tell) Minh not to be scared. => told


5. First, everything (be) new, strange but interesting. => was
6. This morning she (wear) that sandals beautiful. => wore


7. At recess Hoa (drink) some water and talked with her friends. => drank
8. I (have) a stomachache for five weeks ago. => had


9. He often irons his clothes everyweek but this week he (not iron) them. =>
didn't iron


10. What she (eat) for her dinner yesterday? => did- ea<i>t</i>


<b>* 10 points (0,1x 10) keys at the end of each sentense.</b>
<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>


<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to list the things they should do and the things they should’tdo to protect their
teeth healthy.


- Read aloud in front of the class.



 <i><b>We should brush teeth regulary.</b></i>


 <i><b>We should see the dentist twice a year.</b></i>
 <i><b>We shouldn t eat too much sweets</b></i>’


 ...


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the picture and ask Ss to
answer the questions.


- Elicit and introduce the new words.


-Ask Ss to read aloud the new words after
the teacher.


-Ask Ss to read the introduction and
answer the questions.


- Introduce the reading and aks Ss to guess
what they will do in a check up?


-Introduce more the new words and ask Ss
to read the new words in chorus.


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>


<b>partner.</b>


- Listen and answer the questions.


Who are they in the picture ?


Where are they ?


What do you think they are doing ?


- Give the new words:
* New words:


<i>A medical check up</i>: Buæi khám sức khoẻ


<i>Medical record</i>: phiếu khám sức khoẻ


<i>Fill in the medical records</i>; điền vào phiếu
khám sức khoẻ.


- Read the new words aloud after the T.
- Read the introduction and answer the
questions:


- What are these students from?
- What are they doing?


- Listen and guess what they do in a check
up



- Write and read the new words in chorus
- New words:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

-Introduce the polite request


- Play tape and aks Ss to practice the
dialogue.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs then
call some pairs read before the class.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the: Now
answer. Number the sentences, using the
information given in the conversation you
have practiced.


- Write the answers on the BB, and read
aloud the answers.


- Check if necessary.


- Ask Ss to role play the dialogue by using
the tools to have a medical check –up.


Height(n): chiÒu cao.


Measure(v): ®o ( ®o chiỊu cao
Weigh (v) c©n


Scales(n) : cái cân



Waiting room(n): phòng chờ.
Normal(a): b×nh thêng


? Would you open your mouth, please?
Would you + V ?


* need to + V…


Ex: I need to get up early.
- Listen and practice the dialogue


- Read the dialogue in pairs, then some
pairs present before the class.


- Number the sentence using the
information given.


- Write the answers on the BB then read
aloud


f- b- d- g- e- a- h- c


- Practice the dialogue in pairs then change
the role.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Note the main content of the lesson.
- Repeat the new words.



<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Write new words by heart.


- Do exercise A1 on page67 in work book.
- Read and sum up the dialogue.


Ngµy../../2009


Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


Ngun HiỊn
***************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 67. unit 11 : Keep fit, stay healthy</b>


Teaching date:../../2009

<b>Lesson 2: A. A check up (A2,3)/P108</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic : Stay healthy.
And practice the dialogue and fill in the medical records.


-To develop the main skills especially listening.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book..



<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date :...7A:...7B:...7C………7D………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- Do exA1 on p67 in work book .


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to go to the BB and introduce their height, weight and age.
B. Presentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the questions.


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silence and
guess the words to fill in the blanks.


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape sentence by
sentence then try to fill in the blanks.
- Ask Ss to write the answers on the BB ,
and read the dialogue in pairs.


- Check and introduce the structure by
eliciting from ss.





- Ask Ss to read again the dialogue and
then close the book to retell some things
about Hoa.


- Work in pairs, one of you is A and the
other is B. Look at the copy of the medical
record and cover the copy. A asks B about
the missing information and complete the
record.


- Introduce the new words, read and give
the meanings:


<b>A2. Listen. Then write the missing </b>
<b>words.</b>


- Listen and answer the questions.


Who are they in the picture?
What is Hoa doing


- Read the dialogue in silence then guess
the words in the blanks.


- Listen to the tape, try to fill the words in
the blanks.



- Write the answers on the BB then read the
dialogue in pairs.


Doctor: I want to ask you a few


questions before I start, Hoa ? How old are
you ?


Hoa : fourteen.


Doctor: And your weight is one meter


50 centimeters?


Hoa: No, I think I'm shorter. The nurse


measure me.


Doctor: Oh, how tall are you ?


Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters.


Doctor: I'll ask the nurse to check


your height again. How heavy are you ?


Hoa : I think I'm 42 kilograms


<i><b> </b></i>Doctor: No, it says on your form that
you are 40 kilograms



- Give the new words/ structures:
How tall + be + S ?
heavy


S + be + ….+ adj


- Repeat the content of Hoa.
- How old is Hoa ?


- How tall is she when the nurse measured
her ?


- How heavy is she ?


+ Hoa is 14, she is 1.40 meters, she is
40 kilos.


<b>A3. Ask answer questions with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Work in pairs to fill in the information.


- Give the new words, read and give the
meanings:


* New words :


Medical record.



School: HiỊn L¬ng Class: 7A
Full name: Ngun ViƯt Giang
Fore name: ViƯt Giang.


Surname: Ngun


Address: HiỊn L¬ng.


Male: Female:
Age: 14.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

- Give the guiding questions:




Forename: tên đệm và tên chính
Surname: họ.


Male( nam ) >< female.( n÷ )
- Answer the questions


Which class is he in ?
What is his surname ?
Where does he live ?
What is his weight ?
What is his height ?


<b>4. Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main content of the lesson.



- Repeat the way to ask and answer the question about the height, weight…


<i><b>5.Home work:</b></i>


- Learn new words by heart.


- Do exercise A2, 3 p69 in work book.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


<i><b>*****************************</b></i>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 68. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy.</b>


Teaching date:../../2009

<b>Lesson3. B.What was wrong with you?(B1)/P110</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: keep fit, stay
healthy and about the health such as: What was wrong with you ?


Have a bad cold
Have a headache


Have a stomachache…


-To develop the main skills especially listening, and writing skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>



- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book..


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b> 1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson ckeck:</b></i>


- Do exercise A2 p68 in work book .


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


-Ask Ss to complete the medical record by practice asking and answering the questions
with their partner.


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


-Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the questions.


- Introduce the new words by eliciting
from ss then read in chorus and ss read
word by word.



<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Look at the picture and answer the
questions.


Who do you think they are in the
picture?


What questions does Mr Tan ask Lan?
What was wrong with her?


- Give the new words then read aloud
* New words:


Sick: bÞ èm.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

- Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus.
- Introduce the topic of the lesson and aks
Ss to listen to the tape.


- Introduce the questions asking for health:


- Ask Ss to make example and ask Ss to
work in pairs to role play the


- Write the answers on the BB and read the
questions aloud.



- Check if necessary.


- Ask ss to write the answers on the BB.


have a headache: đau đầu
Inside >< out side.


Sick note: giÊy xin phÐp nghØ häc
Virus: vi rót


flu = influenza: cóm
common cold: c¶m thêng
absent from >< present: có
mặt><vắng mặt


combine with: kÕt hỵp
result: kết quả


whole: toàn bé
illness: bÖnh, èm
- Read in chorus.
- Listen to the tape.


- Give the questions about one's health


What is/ was the matter with sb ?
wrong


S + has / had/ have + name of illness.



- Make some ex and read in pairs then
some perform


- Prepare for the answers


- Write the answers on the BB.
* Answer:


<i>a, Lan didn t go to school yesterday </i>’


<i>because she had a bad cold.</i>
<i>b, She had a headache.</i>


<i>c, Mr Tan told Lan to stay inside at recess.</i>
<i>d, The doctor said that Lan had a virus.</i>
<i>e, The doctor wrote Lan s sick note.</i>’


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Retell the main content of the lesson.
- Repeat the new words.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Study the new words and do exB1on p71.
- Prepare for the lesson.


- Read the dialogue by heart.


*****************************



Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 69. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy</b>


Teaching date:../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. What was wrong with you?(B3)</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic : Stay healthy and
knowing more about some popular diseases such as: flu, stomachache, headache.. .
- To develop the main skills especially listening, and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation.</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson ckeck:</b></i>


<b>- </b>Do exercise B 1( page 69) in the work book.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up</b>.


- Ask Ss complete the survey about the Ss' health.



- Work in groups of four in turn to ask and answer the given questions to complete the
survey.


- Using the questions given:


Were you sick ?
Did you have a cold ?


Did you have a stomachache?
Did you have a headache or flu ?


- Teacher give the remark and give the most common illness.


<b>B.Pre</b>sentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to list the diseases they've learnt
on the BB.


- Ask Ss to read the words they write on
the BB.


- Check if necessary.


- Introduce the listening and ask Ss to
work in individual to complete the table
by writing the days in each column.
- Play the tape sentence by sentence.
- Ask Ss to share the questions with the


partners.


- Give the correct answers and write on the
BB.


- Get the meaning of some new words.


-Ask Ss to choose the word that differs
from others.


<b>B3. Listen. Then complete the table.</b>


- List the learnt diseases:
toothache: đau răng


headache: ®au ®Çu
stomachache: ®au bơng
flu


sore throat
sore eye


- Read the words on the BB in chorus
- Listen to the tape and try to complete the
table


- Listen again to check.


- Compare their answer with their partners
- Correct the answers on the BB.



- Give some new words:


Total : tæng sè.


Due to: vì, bởi vì
Problem: vấn đề.


Account for: ChiÕm (trong tæng)


<b>* Open ex:</b>


1. A. ill B. sick


C. sad D. unwell


2. A. flu B. Flat


C. cold D. headache


3. A. doctor B. nurse


C. dentist D. teacher.


4. A. sleep B. take care o


C. nurse D. look for


1- C, 2- B, 3- F, 4- C



<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i> Ngµy../../2009


- Write the diseases you learnt. Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


- Repeat the main content of the lesson.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise B 2+3 +4.( in the work book P 72-73) Ngun HiỊn


- Learn new words by heart.
- Prepare for the new lesson.


******************************************


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Teaching date:../../2009

<b>Lesson 5: B. What was wrong with you?(B4)/P112</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the disease “ The common cold”
They will know more about the symptoms and how to prevent a cold .


-To develop the main skills especially reading skill.


<b>II. Preparation</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>


<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b> 2. Old lesson ckeck:</b></i>


<b>- </b>Do exercise B 2+3+4( page 72+73 ) in work book.


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to play “Rub out and remember” with the words about the diseases.


- Headache. - Flu - Toothache - Stomachache -Cold


<b>B. Pre- reading.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to give the most common
diseases .


- Hang the picture and ask the questions.


- Give the meaning of the words symptom


- Ask Ss to give the answer in Vietnamese
if nesessary.



- Ask Ss to prepare to read the reading and
read the reading in silence and ask Ss to
give the topic of the reading.


<b>- </b>Ask Ss<b> to</b> work in pairs to answer the


questions in the text book.


- Ask Ss to share the answer the answers
and read the answers aloud.


- Check if necessary.


-Get the meaning of the new words from
ss:


<b>B4. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>


- Revise the learnt diseases by giving those
words.


- Observe the picture and answer the
questions


? What are <b>the symptoms of </b>


<b>the common cold ?</b>


- triÖu chøng cđa cóm thêng


Sỉ mịi : a running nose.
Sèt nhẹ: a slight fever
Ho : coughing


Hắt hơi: sneezing .


- Give the answer in Vnese.
- Prepare for the reading.


- Read and give the topic of the reading.
- Answer the question in pairs


- Compare their answers with their friends
* Answer:


a). We call the cold ''common'' because
every year millions of people catch it.


b) They are: running nose, a slight fever,
coughing and sneezing.


c) No, there is no cure for the common
cold.


d) No, these medicines don't cure a cold,
but they relieve the symptoms.


e) We can prevent the cold by eating
well, doing exercise, keeping fit and stay
healthy.



- Give the meaning of the words.
* New words:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

-Ask Ss to read the reading aloud in turn.
-Ask Ss to list the symptom of the common
cold , the way to cure and the way to
prevent the common cold with the book
close


Common: chung , phæ biÕn


Catch: nhiÔm , bị mắc bệnh


Cure: chữa, phơng pháp chữa bệnh


Unpleasant: khó chịu


Drugstore; cửa hàng thuốc


Medicines: thuèc.


Relieve: lµm dịu, bớt đi.


Disappear: biÕn mÊt


Prevent from + Ving: phòng


tránh/ngăn cản



- Read the words aloud.


- Repeat the ways to cure and prevent the
common cold.


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Note the main content of the reading: the symptom, the cures, the way to prevent the
cold.


<i><b>5. Home work:.</b></i>


- Read the text and say somethings about the common cold.
- Prepare the new lesson.


- Do ex4 in work book and prepare for the next lesson.


**************************************


Preparing date:../../2009

<b> </b>

<b>Period 71: Written test 3</b>


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- To check Ss' knowledge after learning 3 lessons.
- To develop the main skills especially presenting skill.


- To revise the vocabulary and structures and grammar they learnt in 3 units.


<i><b> II. Preparation</b></i>



- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet, teaching plan and test'copies
- Ss: Knowlegue through 3 units and old lesson.


<b>A. Questions:</b>
<b>I. Listen and fill in blanks.</b>


It is still winter, but on Sunday the weather (1) ……..fine. We (2) ……….to go on


a trip to the seaside. The (3)……. was bright and warm, but we didn't go into water. It


was so cold. Instead, we walked along the shore and looked at the ships. In the evening


we retunred home. Then, the (4)………wind began to blow and it began to rain. So we


set (5)………. a warm fire. We didn't mind about the weather at all.


<b>II. Read and answer the questions below.</b>


Dear Lili,


I'm in San Francisco now. We arrived there yesterday. Before that, we spent 10
days in New York. It was wonderful. Lan and I visited a lot of interesting places


including the Empire State Building. We climbed up to the top - it was very high, and we
were both a bit frightened. We caught a boat along the river to see the State of liberty.
We walked trough Greenwich Village and watched many artists worked. The paintings
weren't expensive so bought one. We also went to the theatre and watched a musical. I
enjoyed it very much. The weather was OK - a bit wet sometimes. But now in San
Francisco, it is hot and sunny.



Lovely,
Ann


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

.


………


2. Where did Ann visit?


.


………


3. Did Ann watch many artists worked?


.


………


4. What is the weather like in San Francisco now?


.


………


5. When did Ann arrive there?


.


………


<b>III. Write these sentences using the cues, adding the words if necessary.</b>


1. Would/ open/ the window?


...


………


2. What/ you /eat/ for dinner/last night?


.


………


3. The docter/tell/Minh/ not/worry.


.


………


4.Liz's parents/take /her/ Tri Nguyen Aquarium last year.


.


………
<b>IV. Choose the best answer.</b>


1. Which word has different sound from others?


a. brushed b. stayed c. laughed



2. What is wrong……….you, Lan?.


a. with b. to c. for


3. How ...is Nga ? – She is 36 kilos.


a. height b. weight c. heavy.


4. You should ...your hands before meals.


A. to wash b. washing c. wash


5. Would you ...some fruit and vegetables?


a. buying b. buy c. to buy.


<b>V. Rewrite the sentences with the meaning unchanged (using the words given)</b>


1. Lien should go to see the dentist. ( had better)


=> Lien...……… ……...


2. How long is the Mekong River?( length<i><b> )</b></i>


=> What...


3. What is your age?<i><b>(</b></i>old<i><b>)</b></i>


=> How...


4. What is the price of this book? (cost)


=> How……….


<b>VI. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets </b>


1. He (leave)... the meeting six hours ago<i><b> .</b></i>


2. Minh <i><b>(</b></i>go)...to the dentist this morning.


3. We ( be)... at the seaside for ten days last summer.


4. I would like <i><b>(</b></i> tell ) ...you about my family.


5. She (not buy) ……….the cap yesterday.


<b>VII. Give the correct form of words.</b>


1. My classroon is on the ……….floor. (two)


2. Mai is a very famous……….in all my club. (collect)


3. We are having a ………..check up. (medecine)


4. Having the common cold is not very……….(please)


5. Mai's ………is one meter fifty centimeters. (high)


<b>VIII. Fill one suitable word in the blanks.</b>



Last night I didn't sleep……….(1) I had a bad stomachache. This morning


I …………..(2) up late. After that, my mother ………..(3) me to the docter. I


was………(4) but the docter is very………(5). He explained what will
happen to help me pleased.


<b>III. Testing process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<i><b>2.Deliver the test copies :</b></i>


- T delivers the copies to ss without any explanation.
- Observe ss do the tast independently and strictly.


<i><b>3. Collect the completed tests after the bell.</b></i>


- note the tests are enough or not.


<i><b>4. Remark the test lesson.</b></i>


- Do the tests seriously.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Prepare the next lesson.


<i><b>*****************************************</b></i>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 72 unit 12: Let s eat</b>’



Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 1: A. What shall we eat? (A1,2)/P114</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the food such as: chicken, beef, pea,
carrot, cucumber etc and know how to use the structures: too, so, either and neither.
- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking.


<b>II. Preparation</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Going with the new lesson.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to work in pair to list the name of the food they learnt.


- Which group is quicker will the winner group.
- Ask Ss to read again the words.



<b>B.Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the topic of the lesson and ask
Ss to look at the picture of the text book ,
and guess the places of Hoa and her aunt
are.


- Elicit the meaning of the new words from
ss.


-Read the new words aloud in chorus and
ask Ss to make the sentences with the new
words.


<b>A1.Listen and read. Then practice with </b>
<b>a partner.</b>


- Listen and guess where and what Hoa
and her aunt are doing.


- Where are Hoa and her aunt?


- What are there on the stalls ?


- Give the meanings of new words.
* New words:



Chicken ; thịt gà.


Beef : thịt bò.


Pork : thịt lợn.


Pea : đậu


Carrot: cà rốt


Spinach : rau chân vịt


Cucumber : Qu¶ da chuét


Durian : Quả sầu riêng.


Papaya : Quả đu đủ


<i><b> </b></i>Pipeapple : Qu¶ døa.


- Read and make some sentences with
these words.


+ I like chicken, but I don’t like
beef.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen to the
tape one time.


- Explain the meaning of the new words


and ask ss to read aloud some repeat.


- Read the dialogue in pairs aloud. T helps
ss with the pronunciation.


- Explain the new grammar points and give
some exs


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silence.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to roleplay the
dialogue and read the dialogue aloud.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
about the food which you like or you


dislike by being provided more<b> </b>words:




-Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus
and ask Ss to practice in pairs to talk about
the food.


- Call some pairs to talk in front of the
class and the rest listen and practice in
turn.


- Check if necessary.


- Listen to the tape



- Get the meaning of new words from T
then read aloud..


Meat stall : quầy bán thịt
A selection of : sù su tÇm
On display : trng bày, bán


hate : ghét


what about? : còn thì ... sao


Ripe : chÝn


Smell: ngöi


<b>A2. Ask answer questions with apartner.</b>
<b>Talk about the food you like</b>


Neither/ either: cũng thế ( dùng trong câu
phủ định )


So/too: cũng thế - dùng trong câu khảng
định


+ Explain <b>the use of neither, </b>


<b>either/too,so</b>.


( Dùng để diễn tả sự đồng tình phủ
định/khảng định ).



Ex: I am not a student.


Neither is she./ She isn’t, either.
He is a student. She is a student, too


So is she.


- Read the dialogue in silence in pairs.
- Some pairs perform.




* New words:


<i>Grapefruit</i> : Qu¶ bëi


<i>Lemon</i> : Qu¶ chanh


<i>Strawberry</i>: Quả dâu tây


<i>Water-melon</i> : Quả da hấu


<i>Pear</i> : quả lê.


<i>Longan:</i> Quả nhÃn


<i>Mango:</i> Quả xoài


- Read the new words and talk about the


food they like in pairs.


- Some talk, others listen.


+ S1 : I <i><b>like</b></i> pipeapples. Do you like them?


S2: Yes, I like them ,<i><b>too/ so</b></i> do I.


+ S1 : I <i><b>don t like</b></i>’ durians. Do you like


them ?


S2 : No, I <i><b>don t like</b></i>’ them, <i><b>either/ neither</b></i>


do I.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to name the food they learnt in the dialogue.


- Answer the questions the food they like. Ngµy../../2009


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i> Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- List the things they bought in the market by heart
- Do ex1,2 in work book.


- Prepare for the next lesson. NguyÔn HiÒn.


**********************************



Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 73. unit 12: Let s eat</b>’


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 2: A. What shall we eat? (A3,4)/P116</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know how to make a dish and know more about the
food such as: chicken, beef, pea, carrot, cucumber etc


-To develop the main skills especially reading comprehension skill


<b>II. Preparation</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Write the food that have in the last period.
- Read the dialogue and answer T' questions.
- Do ex1,2 on the BB. Others remark.


<i><b> 3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>



- Ask Ss to work in pairs to list the food that Hoa and her aunt bought at the market.


- Write on the BB, and read aloud those things
- Call Ss to role play the diologue in turn.


<b>B.Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the lesson by asking the
questions :




-Ask Ss to read the text in silence and give
the meaning of new words:




-Ask Ss to read the new words in the
chorus after teacher.


- Ask Ss to read the text and answer the
questions :


<b>A3. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>


- Answer the questions:



 Do you always cook meals?


 Do you like this work ?


 What do you have to do when
you cook meals?


- Read the text and give the new words and
their meanings.


* New words:


Slice (v): thái thành lát mỏng.


Boil (v)<i>:</i> luộc


Heat <i>(v)</i>: đun nóng


Stir- fry<i> (v): </i> xào


Add <i>(v)</i>: thêm vào


Salt: muối


Taste (v): nếm, thởng thức
Soy sauce: nớc sốt/sì dầu
Dish: món ¨n


Chopstick: đũa



Green pepper: ít xanh
Onion: cđ hµnh


- Read the new words after T, then some


repeat aloud.


- Read and answer the questions about the
text.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

-Ask Ss to share the answer the correct
answer to the partners.


-Ask Ss to look at : “ Answer the
questions” and answer the questions.


- Ask Ss look at part b) and do the


followings: look at the passage again and
add the missing verbs to complete the
instruction and then match the instructions
to the pictures.


-Write the answer on the BB and read
aloud.


- Check if necessary.


- Ask Ss to look at the book and write the
thing they ate in the morning / afternoon....



- Write thwn ask some to do on the BB,
check if necessary.


What did she do first?


How did she boil the spinach?
What did she do last?


What did Hoa do?


- Compare their answers with their partner.
- Write the menu:


<b>a, Answer the questions: </b>


Menu:


- Cucumber salat with onions.


- Boiled spinach.


- Stir- fried beef with green peppers


and onions.
- Rice


- Match the instructions with the right
pictures



- Write them on the BB then read them
aloud


<b>b, Match:</b>


1. Slice.


2. Slice. 5. Add
3. Heat. 6. Boil
4. Stir- fry. 7. Add.


1) C , 2) F ,3) A , 4) D ,5) B , 6) E ,7 ) G


<b>A4. Write. What did you eat yesterday?</b>


- Write the things they ate for breakfast/
lunch/dinner.


Ex:


- I ate noodles/dumpling(banh bao)/sticky
rice square cake/ravioli(banh cuon)/half-
hatched egg(trung vit lon) for my breakfast
for my breakfast.


- I ate rice, meat, fish and vegetables or
beef, chicken, pork, cucumber and salads
for my lunch/


- I ate bread, boiled/omellete eggs for my


dinner.


- Do on the BB.


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Retell the main content of the lesson.
- Repeat what they ate for their breakfast.


<i><b>5. Home work: </b></i>


- Do ex3+4 in work book on page 74-75.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


- Write what they often eat for each meal.


***************************************


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


After the lesson ss can eluavate how much they have gained in their tests, encourage
them learn English more as much as they can.


<i><b>II. Preparation:</b></i>


- T:The marked tests.


- Ss: Old lesson.



<i><b>III. Teaching process:</b></i>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Attendence :……7A……… ……… …… ……… …… ………, 7B .., 7C .., .7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Checking along with the new lesson..


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>


<i><b>Keys and marks</b></i>
<b>I. 1,5 point (0,3 x 5)</b>


1. was 2. decided 3. sun 4. strong 5. round


It is still in winter, but on Sunday the weather was fine. We decided to go on a trip
to the seaside. The sun was bright and warm, but we didn't go into the water. It was so
cold. Instead, we walked along the shore looked at the ships. In the evening we returned
home. The strong wind began to blow and it began to rain. So we sat round a warm fire.
We didn'tmind about the weather last Sunday?


<b>II. 1,5 points (0,3 x 5)</b>


1. She is in San Francisco now.


2. She visited a lot of interesting places including the Empire state Building.
3. Yes, she did.



4. It is hot and sunny in San Francisco now.
5. She arrived there yesterday.


<b>III. 1 point (0,25 x 4)</b>


1. Woul dyou open the window?


2. What did you eat for dinner last night?
3. The docter told Minh not to worry?


4. Liz's parents took her to Tri Nguyen Aquarium last year.


<b>IV. 2,0 points (0,4 x 5)</b>


1. b
2. a
3. c
4. c
5. b


<b>V. 1 point (0,25 x 4)</b>


1. Lien had better go to see the dentist
2. What is the MeKong river's length?
3. How old are you?


4. How much does this book cost?


<b>VI. 1,25 point (0,25 x 5)</b>



1. left
2. went
3. were
4. to tell
5. didn't buy


<b>VII. 1,25 point (0,25 x 5)</b>


1. second.
2. collector
3. medical
4. unpleasant
5. height.


<b>VIII. 0,5 point (0,1 x 5)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

2. got
3. took


4. scared/nervous
5. kind


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- T checks whether ss redo the tests.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Prepare for the next lesson.



*************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 75. unit 12: Let s eat</b>’


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 3: B. Our food. (B1)/P119</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know how the unhealthy food cause disease to help
people cure and prevent from different diseases such as: stomachache, headache or sore
throat and know how to use the structures: It must be ..../ It was probably..., make sb +
V-infinitive.


- To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex3 in work book on page 78.


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.



<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to write therecipe for the stir -fried beef.


- Write the recipe on the BB.
- Read the recipe aloud.


+ Slice the beef.


+ Slice the green pepper and onion.


+ Heat the pan and stir - fried the beef and green pepper.


+ Add the soy sauce.


<b>B. Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


-Ask Ss to look at the picture and then
answer the questions :


- Introduce the lesson and ask Ss to listen
to the tape to find the causes that make him
worry.


- Play the tape twice and ask Ss to find the
answer for the question.



- Call some Ss to answer the question.
- Introduce the structures and the new
words:


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Observe the picture and answer the
questions.


Where is Ba ?


Can you guess what's wrong with Ba ?
- Listen and find the causes to make Ba
worry.


- Listen to the tape and answer: Why did
Ba have a stomachache?


- Anwer the question.


- Give the new words and structures:
* New words:


<i>It must be</i> : chắc hẳn là.


<i>It is / was probably</i>...: Chắc có thể là
<i>Make sb adj: </i>Làm cho ai đó thế nào



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

- Ask Ss to read the structure and make the
sentences with the structure.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the
story by using the information in the
conversation .


- Write the answers on the BB and read the
story aloud.


- Check if necessary.


-Read the dialogue, and call some pairs to
role play the dialogue.


- Ask Ss to give the food that cause


diseases and tell them what should we do
to prevent ?


<i>Have an awful/terrible headache</i>: bị đau
đầu kinh khủng.


<i>Wash st well carefully</i>: Rửa cái gì sạch/
kỹ.


<i>Dirt( n) -> dirty ( adj</i>)


- Read and make sentences with the words
and structures above.



- Read the dialogue and find information to
fill in the story.


- Write on the BB, others remark.


<b>Complete the story.</b>


Ba went to the <b>doctor</b> because he was


<b>sick</b>. The doctor <b>asked</b> Ba some questions.


Ba said he <b>had</b> some <b>spinach</b> last night.


The doctor said he must <b>wash</b> the spinach


<b>more carefully.</b>


<b>Vegetables</b> can be dirty. The dirt can


<b>make</b> people sick. <b>She</b> gave Be some


<b>medicine</b> to make him feel better.
- Read in pairs then peform before the
class.


- Give the causes of the dieases, then give
advice.


- Wash the food carefully .



- Eat the fresh food.


- Eat the ripe food.


- Eat the food sensibly.


- Stop eating sweets/cakes.


- Wash the hand before meals.


<b>4. Consolidation: </b>


- Retell the main content of the lesson.


- Give the way to prevent the diseases caused by food. Ngµy../../2009


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i> Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần


- Do ex B4 in work book on page 78.
- Write new words by heart.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


Ngun HiỊn
***************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 76. unit 12: Let s eat</b>’


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. Our food. (B2)/P120</b>




<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know the importance of the food to the health, and
the balanced diet: unhealthy/ healthy food, body building food, modarate amounts,
energy, dairy products, cereals and revise the sentence with: Why?=> because.
- To develop the main skills especially listening comprehension skill.


<b> II. Preparation</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Do ex B4 in work book on page 78.


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.
- Do exB4 on the BB, others remark.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to give the ways to prevent the diseasesfrom unhealthy food, and the bad


eating and drinking habits.
- Write the sentences on the BB.



- Wash the food carefully .


- Eat the fresh food.


- Eat the ripe food.


- Eat the food sensibly.


- Stop eating sweet.


- Wash the hand before meals.


B. Presentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the importance of the food in
our daily life, especially food gives us the
main energy for body development. So
abalance diet is very important.


- Ask Ss the food they like best and list the
food they often have for breakfast/ lunch/
dinner.


- Play the tape twice and ask ss to answer
the questions .


- Introduce the new words by eliciting


from ss:


- Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus
after teacher.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice
answering the questions in the text book
- Write the answers on the BB and read the
answers aloud.


<b>B2. Listen and read. Then answer the </b>
<b>questions.</b>


- Listen to the T' introduction.


- Give the food they like best and make a
list.


- Listen to the tape and answer the
questions.


- Give the new words and their meanings.


<b> * New words:</b>


<b> </b>Unhealthy food: thức ăn không bổ dỡng.


Moderate amounts: khối lợng ăn hợp lý
/cân bằng/vừa phải



Energy: năng lỵng.


Balance diet: chế độ ăn cân bằng , hợp


lý.


Fatty food: thức ăn giàu chất béo


Body- building food: Thức ăn giúp phát


triển cơ bắp


Dairy products: thực phẩm bơ, sữa


A variety of : đa dạnh , nhiều loại.


Cereals: ngò cèc


Advantage>< disadvantage: Sù cã lỵi>< bÊt


lỵi


affect: ¶nh hëng


guideline(n): híng dÉn


lifestyle: lèi sèng/ phong c¸ch sèng


- Read the new words aloud after T then
ask some read at seat.



- Practice answering the questions in pairs
- Compare their answers with others then
write them on the BB, others remark.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the
question ''About you''.


- Give the answer in turns.


-Ask Ss to read the text aloud in front of
the rest.


<i>a) Sugar add taste to food and it gives you</i>
<i>energy.</i>


b) <i> A balance diet is not enough, all </i>
<i>people need exercise to keep a healthy </i>
<i>life</i>.


- Ask ss to answer about themselves


Do you think your diet is balanced?
Why/ Why not?


- Answer ss by ss


- Read the text aloud in front of the class.


<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>



- Retell the importance of sugar, and the balance diet.
- Repeat the new words.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Read the text and draw the food pyramid.
- Learn new words by heart.


- Do ex of part B and prapare for the next lesson.


************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 77. unit 12: Let s eat</b>’


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. Our food. (B3)/P121</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


After the lesson Ss will be able to know how to write the recipe for the healthy and
balance meals and know much more to keep our body and health fit abd best.
- To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>



- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Read the text and answer the questions.
- Do ex2 in work book.


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. New lesson.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to list the food they often have for breakfast/ lunch/ and for
dinner.


- Write the food on the BB.


Brea milk eggs chicken fish rice


honey pipeapple potato cheese butter spinach


- Ask Ss to read the food aloud and ask Ss to divide the food into three groups: Body
building, Protective, and energy giving.


Body building: Bread, fish,milk, chicken....
Energy- giving: honey, candy, cake...
Protective: pipeapple, spinach...


- Ask ss to write the menu for yourself to have a healthy meal.



<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- Ask Ss to list the name of the food in the
pictures.


- Read the words aloud.


- Play the tape three times and ask Ss to
listen and write the name of the foods that
Lan, Ba, Nga, and Hoa ate and drank .
- Write the words on the BB.


- Provide the new words:


- Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work
book.


- Correct if necessary.


- Guide ss read the B4 and ask them to
give the ways to keep our body and health
fit before having meals.


<b>they ate and drank.</b>


- Observe the meals in the pictures.



- Rice:


- Noodles:


- Fish:


- Vegetables:


- Fruits:


- Juice:


- Water:


- Beef:


- Read words again aloud then ask some
repeat.


- Listen and write the foods they ate and
drank.


- Write the keys on the BB.


<i><b> Keys:</b></i>


Lan: b, d, f, g.
Ba: c, a, e, f.
Nga: a, d, g.


Hoa: b, e, g.


- Get new word: choose: chän lùa => chose
- Do ex in the work book.


Slice, orange, pork, heat, oil,
papaya, boil, spinach, banana, lunch, beef,
fry, chicken, cucumber, pipeapple, carrot,
soup, lamb, eat, pea,


Meat:...
Vegetable:...
Fruits:...
Cooking:...
Meal:...


<b>Keys.</b>


Meat:. pork, lamb, beef, chicken.


Vegetables: spinach, carrot, pea, cucumber
Fruits: orange, pipeapple, papaya, banana
Cooking: soup,slice, heat, oil, boil, fry
Meal: lunch, eat


- Before we have meals we should


<b>4. Consolidation :</b>


- Retell the main food that they learn in the lesson.


- Make a menu for themselves.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Write the food you often eat in breakfast/ lunch/ dinner.
- Do ex 3,4 in the work book.


- Prepare for the new lesson: Language focus.


********************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 78 :Language focus 4</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammar and revise all the structures and
then do all the exercises.


- To develop the main skills especially writing and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...



<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise :


<b>* Complete the sentences using: either, neither, so, too. </b>


1. Hoa and Nga didn’tgo to the library and Nam ...
2.My mother likes chocolates and...I.


3.Mr Tam will come to the party tonight and his wife...
4. I’m not a teacher and ...he.


5. He can speak chinese. ...I


6.His father doesn’t drink wine and ...his brother.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm up</b>.


- Ask Ss to list the grammar structures that they learnt in the last periods.


- Work in pairs to do the exercises and then write the main structures on the BB.
+ Topic : Vacation or holiday.


Personal hygiene
Sickness.


Food



+ Structure: Past form.


Neither, either, so, too.
More, less, a few, alittle.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to give the form and the use of


the past form.


- Make sentences with the simple past
form.


- Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work
book.


- Write the answer on the BB.


- Check the answer if necessary.


- Ask Ss to give the examples again.


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to give the theory of the indefinite


quantifiers:


<b>I. Theory:</b>



<b>1. The simple past form.</b>


- Give the form and use of the simple past
tense.


Form: S + V-ed + O.


The use: Express the action that
happened in the past.


Ex : I watched TV last night
- Do ex on the BB, others remark.


<b>Keys:</b>


<i>a) No , I didn t. I watched TV.</i>’


<i>b) No , I didn t. I had dinner in a </i>’


<i>restaurant.</i>


<i>c) No , I didn t, I went to the movie </i>’


<i>theater yesterday.</i>


<i>d) No , I didn t, I read a book on the </i>’


<i>weekend.</i>



<i>e) No , I didn t, I played football </i>’


<i>yesterday.</i>


- Give more exs and listen to T.
I didn’t play soccer yesterday.
I played tennis yesterday.
What did you play yesterday?


<b>2. Indefinite quantifiers.</b>


- Give the theory of this grammar.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

- Ask Ss to complete the exercise in the
text book.


- Write the answers on the BB.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.
- Ask Ss to give the theory of these words
and ask Ss to work in pairs to do the
exercise in the text book:


- Work in pairs to complete the exercise.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the
instructions of making cucumber salat.


- T corrects if necessary.


of/ a variousty of/ a wide selection of + N.


- Do ex in the text book.


- Write on the BB, others observe then
remark.


* a lot of tea.
* A little sugar.
* Alot of salt.
* Too much coffee


- Read the dialogue in pairs


<b>3. Too/ Either/ so/ neither</b>.


- Rpeat the use of too, so/ either, neither.
+ So, too: dùng tronh câu khẳng định.
+ Either / neither: dùng trong câu phủ
định


- Do ex in pairs then ask some pairs to
peform before the class.


<b>4. Imperatives</b>


- Give the ways to make salad of cucumber


<i>A) Peel, B) Wash C) Slice </i>
<i>D) Mix E) Add F) Stir </i>
<i>G) Wait.</i>



<i><b>4.Consolidation:</b></i> <i><b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b></i>


- Ask Ss to retell the main contents of the lesson. Ngµy../../2009


- Give the way to boil the Muong vegetable.


<i><b>5.Home work:</b></i>


- Learn your lesson and prepare for the next lesson.


- Do ex "Test your self 4". Ngun HiỊn


***************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 79. unit 13: activities.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 1: A. Sports. (A1, 3)/P129</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: Sports and they
will learn the new words: baseball, skateboarding, roller- skating, basket ball and know
to form and the uses of the adverbs of manner.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.



<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to name some kinds of sports they know in English.


<i><b>3.Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up .</b>


- Ask Ss to devide these sports into two groups:
Basketball Tennis.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Bicycling Walking.


<b>B.Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the topic of the lesson and ask
Ss to name some sports in the pictures, T
help ss with new words.


- Give the meaning of the new words and
read the new words aloud in chorus.


- Ask Ss to read the reading in silence and


then list the sports they know.


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and then
read the text .


- Introduce more new words:
- Ask Ss to read the new words.


- Ask Ss to read the text and then work in
pairs to practice answering the questions.
- Write the correct answers on the BB and
read them aloud.


- Ask Ss to read the text aloud in front of
the class.


- Read again the name of sports.


- Introduce the order of the lesson and ask
Ss to read the sports in the text book on P
130.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions about the
sports they like.


- Ask Ss to write the number of students
who like each sport best. Then add
altogether to see which sport is the most



popular in the class.<b> -</b>Ask Ss to look at the


text book ( p 131<b>) </b>and then listen to the


introduction of the lesson.


- Ask Ss to name the sports in the pictures.
- Listen to teacher about the adverbs of
manner.


<b>A1. Listen and read. Then answer the </b>
<b>questions.</b>


- Listen to the T, observe the pictures
and name some sports .


- Roller - skating: trợt pa tanh bằng
giầy ở bốn góc


- Roller - blading: Trợt pa tanh bằng
giầy có bánh xe nằm dọc


- Base ball: Bómg chày
- Skateboarding: Trợt ván.


- Athletics: Môn thể dục dụng cụ
- Give the meaning of the new words and
read in chorus aloud.


- Read and name sports they know.


- Listen to the tape then read the text.
- Some new words will help them:


Surprising result: Kết quả đáng ngạc


nhiªn.


The most popular choice: Sù lùa chän


phæ biÕn nhÊt.


One of the world’s most popular
games: Một trong những môn thể thao đợc
a chuộng nhất.


- Read the text again and answer the
questions.


- Write the answers on the BB and read
them aloud.


- Read the text before the class.
- Read the sports aloud.


- Practic in pairs to ask and answer the
questions about the sports they like.
S1: Which sports do you like best?
S2: I like badminton best.


table tennis


athletics


- Make sure what sports ss like best.


<b>A3. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Listen to T and name some sports leart.
- Listen to T the way to form adverbs:
+ Form: Adj + ly = Adv.
+ Use: To express how someone does
something .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Ask Ss to read the examples then ask Ss
to read the sentences in the text book .
- And aks Ss to explain the way to use the
adverbs in the sentences.


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to listen to the order of the lesson


and give the meaning of new words:


- Read the new words aloud.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to change the
adjectives into adverbs.


- Write the answers on the BB.


- Read the reading again.



Bad -> Badly.


Safe -> Safely.


Interesting -> Interestingly.


Careful -> Carefully.


Careless -> Carelessly.


Skillfull -> Skillfully.


Clear -> Clearly.


He is a <b>quick runner </b>


He runs <b>quickly.</b>


She is a very <b>careful person.</b>


She does her home work <b>carefully.</b>


- Read the ex and sentnces in the ex.
- Read then give the way to use the adv in
the ex.


<b>Adj </b>goes <b>before noun</b> and


modify the noun.



<b>Adv </b>goes with the sentences that


have <b>ordinary verb</b> and they modify the


verbs.


<b>Note:</b><i><b> *</b></i> Good -> well.
Hard -> hard


Fast -> fast
Early -> early


Late -> late.


* TÝnh tõ tËn cïng lµ y -> ily
TÝnh tõ tËn cïng lµ ble -> bly
TÝnh tõ tËn cïng lµ ic -> ically
- Give more new words:


Summer is on its way: kỳ nghỉ hè đang
đến gần.


Aim: mục đích


Water safety awareness: chó ý vỊ sù an
toµn díi níc.


Pool lifeguard: ngêi cøu hé.



Pool edge: thành bể


Obey: tuân theo


Be aware of : nhận thức


Red and yellow flags: cờ đỏ, cờ vàng.
- Read new words aloud.


- Do ex:


Clear -> Clearly.


Careful -> Carefully.


Safe -> Safely.


Careless -> Carelessly.


Strict -> Strictly.


<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson: <b>Ngay../../2009</b>


The famous sports in the USA and in Vietnam. <b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to write the name of sports.


- Do the exercise 1, 2, 3 in the work book.


- Prepare for the next lesson. <b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 80. unit 13: activities.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 2: A. Sports. (A4,5)/P132</b>



<b>I.Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know the useful of walking and review the adverbs
of manner.


- To develop the main skill especially reading and writing comprehension skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do exercise 1+2+3 in work book
- Others observe and remark.



<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to form the adverbsfrom the adjectives:


Slow. -> ... Quick ->...


Early. -> ... Fast. ->...


Late. -> ... Hard. ->...


Safe. -> ... Clear. ->...


Bad. -> ... Good .->...


Early. -> ... Fast. ->...


<b>B. Pre</b>sentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the reading and ask Ss to
answer the questions:


- Ask ss to read the text in silence and ask
Ss to answer the questions by trying to
guessing the meaning of the new words.
- Share the answers to the partner.


- Call Ss to read the questions aloud.



- Give the meaning of new words for Ss to
write the answers down.


- Ask Ss to read the new words aloud in
chorus.


<b>A4. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>


- Listen and answer the questions.


 What are the Ss in the picture doing?


 Do you often take a walk?


 What are the benefits of walking?


- Read the text and try to guessing new
words' meaning.


- Compare their answers with their partner
then read them aloud.


- Give the new words and write the
answers in their notes.


* New words:


competion : Cuộc thi



Win: Chiến thắng


First prize: Giải nhất


Wish: mong íc


Therefore: do đó


Organize: Tỉ chøc.


Paticipate in(v) = take part in(v):tham gia


Paticipant (n): Ngời tham dự


Increase: tăng lên.


Volunteer: Tình nguyện


inexpensive: Khụng t


Ability: khả năng


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

- Read the text and write the answers on
the BB.


- Correct if necessary.


- Call Ss to read the text aloud


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to give the benefit of walking:



- Work in pairs to discuss the questions.
- Write the benefit on the BB.


* Answers:


<i>a) He takes part in Walking For Fund </i>
<i>( WFF) club.</i>


<i>b) The writer s school team won the first </i>’


<i>prize ; they are so happy and wanted to</i>
<i>keep the activities.</i>


<i>c) One activity is a five km walk to the </i>
<i>beach on Sunday morning; and the </i>
<i>other is walk- to- school day.</i>


<i>d) It is 5 km from school to the beach.</i>
<i>e) Wednesday is the WTS day.</i>


<i>f) Members living near school often take </i>
<i>part in the WTS day.</i>


- Read the text aloud.


- Give the benefit of walking in pairs:
- Write on the BB.


+ Walking:



- Fun. For everyone.


- Easy. Healthy.


- Inexpensive. ...


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson
The useful of walking.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Read the text smoothly.


- Do exercise 4 in work book on p 83.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>**********************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 81. unit 13: activities.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 3: B. Come and play (B1)/P134</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the modal verbs: must, have to,
ought to



- To develop the main skills especially reading and listening skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date : ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do exercise 4 in work book on p83.
- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A.Warm up:</b>


- Ask Ss to give the way to call these persons who play <i><b>: </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>B. Presentation</b>.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Aks Ss to look at the picture in the text
book and answer the question:


- Play the tape and aks Ss to listen to the


explaination of the T about the modal
verbs.


- Ask Ss to make example with the modal
and new words.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue to answer the
questions in the text book.


- Write the answers on the BB.
- Read the answers aloud.


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to look at the exercise 2 to


practice the modal verbs by making the
similar dialogues.


- Read the dialogue aloud ( work in pairs).
- Call some pairs to read the dialogues
aloud.


- Ss go on with b and c part in the text
book.


- T notes the use of modal verbs.


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a patner.</b>


- Look at the picture and answer the
questions:



 What are Nam and Ba
doing ?


 Can you play table
tennis?


- Listen to T 's explanation.


<i><b>Ought to</b></i>: nên.


<i><b>Must</b></i> : phải +V<i><b>- Infinitive</b></i>


<i><b>Have to</b></i>: ph¶i
paddle (n): picture


spare = free (a): translation
borrow (v): mime.


- Make some ex.:


I ought to finish the ex before 8 o'clock.
I must do the home work first .


I have to finish this question.


<b>+ Would you like + to </b>–<b>infinitive....?</b>
<b> </b> <b> I'd like to. But I can t.</b>’


<b>+ It takes (sb) time to V (st): mất bao tg </b>


<b>để làm gì.</b>


It takes me fifteen minutes to walk to school.


- Read and answer the questions.
- Write the answer on the BB and read
aloud.


a)<i> Nam must finish his homework before </i>
<i>he plays table tennis.</i>


<i>b) Nam will be ready in few minutes.</i>
<i>c) Ba will finish a question for Math.</i>
<i>d) Ba has two paddles</i>


- Make similar dialogue and read aloud.
- Some pairs peform before the class.
- Do the same part b and c


- Repeat the use of model verbs.


<i><b>Might ---> should---> ought to</b></i>
<i><b>---> have to ---> must</b></i>


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Note the use of modal verbs.


- Repeat the way to refuse the invitation.



<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise B 1+2 in the work book.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


- Learn new words by heart.


<b>********************************</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. Come and play. (B2)/P135</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the strange sports such as: Scuba
driving, special breathing equipment, deep- sea diving vessel, roller - skating and roller
blading.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading.


<b> II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>



- Ask ss to do exercise1, 2 in work book.


- Write new words, read and give the meanings.
- Read the dialogue by heart.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A.Warm up:</b>


- Ask Ss to play the game by filling in the blanks the missing letters.
1) b-dm—t-n :...


2) v-ll—b-ll :...
3) b-sk—b-ll :...


<b>B. Pre</b>sentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
and introduce the lesson:


- Listen and answer the questions.
- T provide the new words:


- Ask ss to scan the text in silence. And
give the main content of the text by
answering the questions:


- Ask Ss to read the reading again and


decide whether the statements are True or
False and check and then correct the
statements.


- Write the answers on the BB.


<b>B2. Listen. Then practice with a </b>


<b>partner. Change the underlined details </b>
<b>using the information in the box.</b>


- Observe the picture and answer the
questions.


 Which sports are they?


 Where can we play ?


 What equipment do we
need?


- Listen and answer the questions.
- Give the new words.


<b>* New word:</b>


Worlds surface: translation.


Pearl diver: thợ lặn lÊy ngäc.



Special breathing equipment: dơng cơ
thë


Invent (v): ph¸t minh.


Invention (n): sự phát minh.


Deep- sea diving vessel: tàu lặn sâu.
- Scan the text and give the main content.
What do you know about scuba –diving
after reading the text?


- Read again and answer the questions
True or False.


- Answer the questions on the BB.


<i>a)</i> False: <i>Most of the world s surface is </i>’


<i>water.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

- Write down some more new words:


- Ask Ss to read the text aloud and listen to
the introduction about the under sea


Discoveries of Jacques Yves Cousteau.
- Ask Ss to complete the text by using the
modal verbs in the box.



- Write the correct answer on the BB.
-Read aloud the read in.


<i>c)</i> False: <i>Now, scuba- diving is a popular </i>


<i>sport because people can swim freely in</i>
<i>the warter with the help of special </i>
<i>breathing equipments.</i>


<i>d)</i> False: <i>Jacques Cousteau invented a </i>


<i>deep-sea diving vessel.</i>


<i>e)</i> True.


- Get more new words


In the early 1940s: vào đầu những năm
1940.


Explore: khám phá.


Thanks to. Nhờ có.
- Read the text


- Complete the text by using the model
verb.


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>



- Ask Ss to give the main content of the reading: About the scuba- diving.


<b>5. Home work:</b>


- Ask Ss to write the new words.


- Do the exercise 4 (p85) in the work book.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần.</b>
<b>Ngày../../2009</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>
<b>***********************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 83. unit 13: activities.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 5: B. Come and play. (B3)/P136</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the strange sports such as: Scuba
driving, special breathing equipment, deep- sea diving vessel, roller - skating and roller
blading.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.


- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do the exercise B4 in the work book on p86.
- Write new words , read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to play the net work with the topic : TV programme.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b>B. Presentation.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
and introduce the lesson:


- Listen and answer the questions.
- T provide the new words:


- Ask ss to scan the text in silence. And
give the main content of the text by
answering the questions:



- Ask Ss to read the reading again and
decide whether the statements are True or
False and check and then correct the
statements.


- Write the answers on the BB.


- Write down some more new words:


- Ask Ss to read the text aloud and listen to
the introduction about the under sea


Discoveries of Jacques Yves Cousteau.
- Ask Ss to complete the text by using the
modal verbs in the box.


- Write the correct answer on the BB.
- Read aloud the read in.


<b>B3. Read. Then answer the questions.</b>


- Observe the picture and answer the
questions.


 Which sports are they?


 Where can we play ?


 What equipment do we


need?


- Listen and answer the questions.
- Give the new words.


<b>* New word:</b>


World’s surface: translation.


Pearl diver: thợ lặn lấy ngọc.


Special breathing equipment: dng c
th đặc biệt


Invent (v): ph¸t minh.


Invention (n): sù ph¸t minh.


Deep- sea diving vessel: tàu lặn sâu.
- Scan the text and give the main content.
What do you know about scuba –diving
after reading the text?


- Read again and answer the questions
True or False.


- Answer the questions on the BB.


<i>f)</i> False: <i>Most of the world s surface is </i>’



<i>water.</i>


<i>g)</i> True.


<i>h)</i> False: <i>Now, scuba- diving is a popular </i>


<i>sport because people can swim freely in</i>
<i>the warter with the help of special </i>
<i>breathing equipments.</i>


<i>i)</i> False: <i>Jacques Cousteau invented a </i>


<i>deep-sea diving vessel.</i>


<i>j)</i> True.


- Get more new words


In the early 1940s: vào đầu những năm
1940.


Explore: khám phá.


Thanks to. Nhờ có.
- land (n): translate
- equipment (n):
- vessel (n):= boat
- ocean (n) = sea


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- T introduces the lesson by anwsering the


questions:


- Read and give the meanings of these
words.


- Give the correct answers:


- Complete the text by using the model
verb.


<b>* New words of B4*<sub>:</sub></b>


- scientist:
- human:


- nature (n)=> natural (a)
- mainly


- opportunity:
- submarine:
- frontier:


<b>* Answer:</b>


<b>can; must; can; must; ought to; can't; </b>
<b>ought to; should</b>


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to note the main content of the lesson.



<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise a 1+2 in the work book( p87-88).
- Learn new words and the first text.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


******************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 84. unit 14: freeeime fun</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 1: A. Time for TV. (A1)/P139</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: Activities in
freetime and learn how to use the structure: Like and prefer + to – infinitive/ gerund,
prefer + Ving + to + Ving.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>



- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


<b>15 minute- test</b>


<b>* Choose the best answer.</b>


1) They prefer reading... watching TV.
a) than b) More than c) to.


2) What kinds of ...do you like ? - I like cartoons.
a) books b) Films c) Pictures.


3)What would you like ...? – Pop music.
a) to watch b) to play c) to listen to.
4) Teenagers like...the latest pop music.


a) hearing b) hear c) to hear.


5)...have dinner at my house ? - Yes, I'd love to.
a) Do you like b) Would you likec) What about .


6) Children enjoy watching...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

7) “ Tom and Jerry “ is a...


a) play b) music program c. cartoon.


8) You ought...to the dentist.



a) to go b) go c) going.
9)I ... stay in bed because I have a bad cold.
a) must b) can c) shouldn’t.
10) Mr Robinson speaks Vietnamese very...
a) Fluently b) skillfully c) good.


<i><b>3.Presentation. </b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


B. Presentation.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and give the
structure that they've learnt.




- Ask Ss to write the name of some
programmes in English.




- Listen and give the structures.


- Read the new words aloud.


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs in
turn.



- Read the dialogue and then do the
exercise in the text book.


- Ask Ss to do the exercise .


- Ask ss to do ex, then correct them in the
BB.


<b>A.1 Listen. Then practicemwith a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Answer T's questions.


 Do you often watch TV?


 What time do you watch
TV?


 What is your favorite
programme?


- Some programs in English:
"The adventure of the Cricket":
- Listen and give the learned structures:


<b>Would you like + to- infinitive...?</b>
<b> Prefer to do doing smt to smt.</b>


<b>N + to + N</b>



- Name some programmes in English


News in English: b¶n tin tiÕng anh.


Series : “ The adventure of the
Cricket”. Phim nhiÒu tËp dÕ mèn phiêu
kiêu kí.


That sounds boring: nghe có vẻ chán nhØ.
- Read the dialogue


- Work in pairs and do ex.


<b>* </b>Use<b> prefer to + V </b>in order to write the
sentences:


1) My brothers/ play tennis / swim.


...
2) I/ ride / walk.


...
3) he/ pop music/ classical music.


...
4) My brother / walk/ cycle.


...
5. Most children/ cartoons / movies.



...


<b>- * Choose the best answer:</b>
<b>a, C</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to note the main content of the lesson.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise3 +4 in the work book( p88-89).
- Learn new words and the first text.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>*******************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 85. unit 14: freeeime fun</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 2: A. Time for TV. (A2)/P141</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: Activities in
freetime and revise how to use the structure: would you like to + V?; What about; How
about;


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do the exercise B3, 4 in the work book on p88,89.
- Write new words , read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. Presentation. </b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b> - </b>Ask ss to listen to the TV progams they like to watch onTV.


 Sport shows.


 Children's program.


 Music shows.


 Entertainments.


 The world today.



 Early news.


B. Presentation.


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- AskSs to look at the advertisements in


the text book &listen to the explanation of
them.


- Ask ss to give the new words and their
meanings.


<b>B2. Listen and read. Then practice with </b>
<b>a partner.</b>


- Listen to the ads and T's explanation.
* <b>New words:</b>


Ha Noi Youth Culture House: Nhà văn
hoá thanh niên Hà nội.


Pop concert: Chơng trình nhạc pốp.


Hanoi Opera house: Nhà hát lớn Hànội.


Classical concert: hoà nhạc cổ điển.
Fansland: Rạp Fansland.



Detective movie: Phim trinh thám.


New Age theater: rạp thế hệ mới.


cowboy film: phim cao båi Mü


drama club: câu lạc bộ kịch
classical:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

- Ask ss to read new words in chorus and
individual.


<b>- </b>Play the tape and ask Ss to give the main


structures that have in the text.


<i><b> </b></i>


- Give the structures and ask them to give
the examples.


- Ask ss to read aloud their own dialogues.
- Ask ss to make the same conversations
based on the Ads.


- Read the new words loudly.


- Listen to the tape and give the structures
they have learned



<b>* Structure: 1. Đề nghị, gợi ý, mời, rủ</b>
<b>(?) Would you like + to V...?</b>
<b> How about + Ving...?</b>


<b> What about + Ving...?</b>
<b> Let s + V...</b>’


<b> (+) - Yes, I'd love to.</b>


<b> - Ok. That's a good idea.</b>
<b> - Why not?</b>


<b> - Sounds great</b>


<b> (-) - Oh, I'm sorry I can't</b>


<b> - I'm afraid I can't. I have to.</b>
<b> - That's too bad. Maybe next </b>
<b>time.</b>


<b>2. Yêu cầu ai đó làm gì:</b>
<b>(?) Can + S + V + O/A?</b>


<b>(+) - Yes, of course. Here you are.</b>
<b> - Go ahead:</b>


<b> - Sure. Here you are.</b>
<b>(-) - I'm sorry. I'm using it.</b>
<b> - I don't have it.</b>



- Read the dialogue.


- Make some conversation based on the
ads.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to retell the mainn form structures are in the lesson.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to read the reading and do the exercise in the text book.
- Learn new words and prepare for the next lesson.


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>
<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


<b>**************************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 86. unit 14: freeeime fun</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 3: A. Time for TV. (A3)/P142</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: The development
of TV and the Vietnamese culture spirit : gather, black and white TV, program.



- To develop the main skills especially reading skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>


A. <b>Warm up.</b>


- Ask ss to list the TV programs that they know in English.
- Write them on the BB.


 Children program.


 News.


 Weather forecast.


 Early news.



 Films.


 Sport shows.


 Music shows.


 Discovery program.


 Talk VN


 Vnese-Businessman


 gold bell ringing program


 Who is billionnaire?


 The wheel fortune.


B. <b>Pre</b>sentation:


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the lesson by asking Ss to look
at the pictures in the book and then


describe them.


- Ask Ss to guess the content of the reading
base on the title and the pictures.



- Ask Ss to scan the text and give the main
content of it.


- Ask Ss to read the text again and then
answer the questions:


- Ask ss to give the new words and provide
some new words.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the text
and share the answers to theirs friends and
write the answers on the BB.


<b>A3. Read. TV in Viet Nam</b>


- Describe the pictures before listening.


 There are 3 pictures , the first
picture is the picture of Vietnamese
village.


 The second one is describing
people watching TV.


 The third is the Vietnamese
village nowsaday.


- Guess what the text is about.


- Scan the text and get the main content.


- Read again and answer the questions.


Did many Vietnamse have
TV at home ?


 What did they do in the
evening?


 What colors were the TV
programs 30 years ago?


 Where do they watch TV
now ?


- Elicit the words from the text.


<b>* New words:</b>


<i><b>TV owners</b></i>: Nh÷ng nhµ cã TV.
<i><b>Gather:</b></i> tơ tËp, tËp trung.


<i><b>Any more:</b></i> ( trong câu phủ định) khơng
cịn nữa.


<i><b>No longer</b></i>: ( trong câu khẳng định).
- Work in pairs and compare with their
answer then write them on the BB.


<b>* Complete the story:</b>



In 1960s , most <b>people</b> in Viet nam <b>did </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- Check the answers if necessary.
- Call Ss to read the summary aloud.
- Ask ss to read the text aloud in front of
the class.


- Ask Ss to work in group to read the
summary again and then they give the
main content of the text without the text
book.


were <b>popular</b>. In the <b>evening</b>, the


neighbors would <b>gather</b> around the TV.


<b>They</b> would stay until the TV programs


finished. Vietnam is different <b>today</b>. More


families <b>have</b> a TV set and life is more


comfortable. But neighbors don’t <b>know </b>


each ather as well as they did in the past.
- Read the summary.


- Read the text aloud before the class.
- Work in groups to give the content of the
text without the text book.



<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Ask Ss to give the main content of the text : The development of TV .


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


<i>- </i>Ask Ss to do the exercise3+4( p 89) in the work book.


- Learn passage and prepare for the next lesson.


<b>*********************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 87. unit 14: freeeime fun</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. What's on? B1,2)/P144</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to practice about the topic TV in Vietnam and they will
discuss about the programs they like best: program for teenagers, sport shows, cartoons,
revise the uses of structures: like + V-ing, prefer+ V-ing...


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>



- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do the exercise B3,4 in the work book on p89
- Write new words , read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to retell the main content of the last lesson.


- Ask Ss to write the sentences using the verb :


<b>Prefer -V-ing to + Ving...?</b>


Ex: <i>I prefer watching TV to listening to music.</i>
<b>B. Presentation.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


<b>- </b>Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book


and<b> </b>then answer the questions :


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Look at the pictures and answer the


questions.


 What is on TV now?


 Who are the main
characters ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Introduce the lesson and play the tape the
first time, then introduce the new words:


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read the
dialogue twice and then work in pairs to
discuss anwering the questions.


- Share the answers to others and write the
answers on the BB then read the answers
aloud.


- Check the answers if necessary.


- Call Ss to role play the dialogue in turn.
- Ask Ss to look at the order of the


listening and listen to the tape to write the
correct time for each program.


- Provide the meaning of new word:
- Play the tape three times and ask Ss to
write the time



- Ask Ss to give the correct answers.


the cartoon ?


 Do you like to watch
cartoon?


- Listen to the tape and get or elicit the
words.


Like to do: muon lam gi


doing: Thích làm gì.


Prefer doing smt: Thích làm gì hơn
Sport shows: Các chơng trình thể thao.


Cartoon: phim hoạt hình
Be on at: đang chiếu tại


- Listen to the tape, read and try to answer
the questions.


- Compare the keys with others and write
them on the BB then read aloud.


<b>* Answer:</b>


a) No, There are not many good
programs for teenagers.



b) Ba watches sport shows, cartoons
and movies.


c) Nga like to watch programs about
the teenagers in other countries.
d) Nga doesn’t like the music programs


because they don’t play the music
she likes.


e) In the evening, Nga is going to listen
to the radio and maybe read abook.


- Play role to read the dialogue.


<b>B2. Listen and write the times of the </b>
<b>programs</b>


- Read the order of the listening.


- Elicit the words. A fistful of Dollars :


phim đồng tiền vấy máu.


- Listen to the tape three times and write
the times they hear then write them on the
board


a) Children's program starts at five.



a) The early news i


Preparing date:../../2009<b> Period 88. unit 14: freeeime fun</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 5: B. What's on? (B3,4)/P145</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to practice about the topic TV programs and they will
know some programs in English: What is on TV today ?


- To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

- Write new words, read and give the meanings.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up:</b>



Some programs in English.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the reading and guess
the topic of the lesson through the
pictures and write down the new words:


- Ask ss to read the words loudly in chorus
then individual.


- Ask ss to read the reading and answer
the questions in the book.


- Write the answers on the BB after share
the answers to the partners.


- Ask Ss to read the reading aloud


- Ask Ss to look at the exercise in the text
book and ask Ss to work in pairs to


complete the reading.


- Ask ss to give and provide the meaning of
new words:



- Read the words loudly and help them
correct.


<b>B3. Listen and read. Then answer the </b>
<b>questions.</b>


- Look at the text and guess the main
content of it.


- Some words:


The Moffats band: ban nh¹c Mofats.


Four contestants of “The road to the
Olympia Peak”: 4 thí sinh trong đờng lên
đỉnh Olympia.


The famous detective Sherlock Holmes:
Th¸m tư lõng danh Sherlock Homes.


Audience: khán giả.


Show<i><b>:</b></i> các chơng trình biĨu diƠn


Perform<i><b>:</b></i> biĨu diƠn


Contest(n)=> contestant (n): cc
thi, nguoi thi, thi sinh.


- Read the words loudly.



- Read the text and try to answer the
questions in pairs.


- Write answers on the BB.


<b>Answer:</b>


a) Teenagers like to hear the lastest pop
music and see the shows of their favorite
artists.


b) In contest programs, the contestants are Ss
, workers, or family members.


c) Imports usually include police and hospital
series.


d) I want to see the children's program.


- Read the text aloud


<b>B4. Write. Complete the passage. Use </b>
<b>the words in the box.</b>


- Read the text and find the suitable in the
box to fill in the passage.


<b>* New words:</b>



TV game shows. Ch¬ng trình trò chơi.


TV talk shows: chng trỡnh to m


Ordinary characters: nhân vật đời thờng.


Satellite TV: trun h×nh vƯ tinh.


Cable TV: truyền hình cáp


A wide variety of programs: đa dạng các
chơng trình.


available:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Share the answers to others.
- Write the answers on the BB.


- Ask Ss to read the reading.


-Ask ss to give the main content of the
lesson.


- Share answer with their friends then wite
them on the BB.


<b>* Answer:</b>


1. around. 2. Watch.



3. Listen. 4. Series.


5. Show. 6. Like.


7. Station. 8. Receive.


9. Cities. 10.Possible.


- Read the text loudly.


<i><b>4. Consolidation: </b></i>


- Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson :


The TV programs the teengers like.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise B3,4 (p:91 ) in the work book.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>
<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


*******************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 89. Written test 4</b>



Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


-

To check Ss knowledge after learning three lessons : 12+13+14 to test Ss the modal


verbs, toV, V-ing , so, too, either, neither ,


- To develop the main skilld especially writing and presenting skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


<b>Questions</b>


<b>I. Listen and fill a word in the blanks. (1,5ms)</b>


My younger brother, Tim is an active boy. He often does many (1)……… ….


things. He (2)………….playing chess with the friend Jack because Jack is a good chess


player. In the summer he often goes (3) ………..and fishes with his classmates.


His hobby is(4)………….. stamps and he has a big collection of foreign stamps. His


favorite subjects at school are Math and English, so he often watches the (5)………….


of English on TV.


<b>II. Read and answer the questions: (2,0ms)</b>



Nowadays, television becomes very popular. Both old and young people enjoy
watching it very much. TV programs attract millions of viewers all over the world. In
addition to the news, television stations also broadcast many interesting programs such
as sports, music, cartoons, movies, contests,... At present, people can enjoy a live
program on TV. In our country, we often watch live TV programs of important events
and international football matches.


<b>New words:</b>


Attract ( v) : thu hút. Television station : ( n) đài truyền hình.
Viewer ( n) : ngời xem. Broardcast : phát ( các chơng trình ..)


In addition to: thêm vào đó. A live program: Chơng trình truyền hình trực tiếp
1. Who enjoy watching television?


..


………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

..


………


3. Can people enjoy a live program on TV ?


..


………


4. What do we often watch in our country ?



...
5.What TV programs do you like best?


………
<b>III. Write the adverbs of the adjectives below. (1,0m)</b>


<b>IV. Choose the best answer. (1,5 ms)</b>


1. They prefer reading...watching TV.


A. than B. more than C. to
2. I like swimming. -...


A. So does he. B. Yes, I do C. I do, so.
3. Some teenagers enjoy...


A. roller- skate B. roller- skating C. roller- skates.
4. She ought to...her homework before going to bed.


A. finishes. B. finish C. finishing.
5. What would you like ... ? – Pop music.


A. to watch. B. play C. listen


6. I don't like pork meat. My husband eats so little. He doesn't like it,………..


A. so B. too C. either D. neither


7. Hoa made cucumber salad……….some onions.



A. in B. with C.of D. from


8. Ling set the table…………..plates, bowls, chopsticks and glasses.


A. by B. of C. from D. with


9. What is ………lunch?


A. in B. with C. for D. to


10. It took us two days ………to HCMC by car.


A. to go B. going C. go D. to going


<b>V. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (1,25m)</b>


1. Ba went to see the doctor because he ( be ) ...sick.
2. She (not watch )...TV everynight.


3. I’d like ( tell )... you something about myself.


4. Children should ( spend)...a small part of their free time playing videogames.
5. The students (live) near the school often (go) to school on foot.


<b>VI. Rewrite the sentences with the meanings unchange. (1,25m)</b>


1. She swims badly.


=> She is a ………



2. He is a fast runner.


=> He ………...


3. Mai likes watching TV more than going to the theatre.


=> Mai prefers………..


4. My mother doesn't eat fish and I don't, either.


=> My mother doesn't eat fish………..


5. Come and play tennis with me.


=> Would you ………..?


<b>VII. Give the correct form of words. (1,0m)</b>


1. Sugar is a …………..food with the moderate amount. (health)


2. She sings that English song very………….(good)


3. You must be…… …….. .or you will be addictive in video games. (care)


4. All of us should play outdoor in order to develop our……...skill. (society)


Adjectives => Adverbs Adjectives => Adverbs.


1, Good ... 6, Slow …...



2, Quick ... 7, Fast ...


3, Free ... 8, Sudden …...


4, Skillful ... 9, Hard …...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

5. I think it is the most……….. idea. (sense)


<b>VIII. Find the mistakes and correct them. (0,5m)</b>


1. My brother likes apples and I do, either. ………


2. He buyed a car yesterday. ………


3. She is a good cooker. ………


4. Children perfers watching cartoons. ………


5. Mai has a toothache. She 'd to better go to the dentist'. ………


<b>III. Testing process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Date………..7A………..7B……… ………7C .7D……….


<i><b>2. Deliver the test copies :</b></i>


- T delivers the copies to ss without any explanation.
- Observe ss do the tast independently and strictly.



<i><b>3. Collect the completed tests after the bell.</b></i>


- note the tests are enough or not.


<i><b>4. Remark the test lesson.</b></i>


- Do the tests seriously.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Prepare the next lesson.


******************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 90. unit 15: going out.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 1: A. Video games (A1)/P147</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: Video games.
and know more about kinds of entertainments.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.



<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Going with the new lrsson.


<i><b>3. Presentation.</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up:</b>


- Ask ss to play the net work with the activities Ss often play to entertain.


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and
introduce the lesson.


- Ask ss to listen to the tape and then
guess the things Nam does .


- Ask ss to give and provide more new
words:


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>



- Introduce the lesson by using the picture.
- Listen to the tape without books and
guess what Nam does.


- Give the new words:


Video games: trò chơi điện tử Addictive<b>:</b>
<b>Entertainmen</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

- Ask Ss to read the new words aloud and
then read the dialogue in pairs.


- Ask ss to read the dialogue and then
asnwer the questions read the dialogue in
pairs.


-Call some pairs to read the dialogue in
front of the class.


- Share the answers with the partners by
reading the answers aloud.


- Call some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to dicuss about
the content of the lesson.


- Call some pairs to speak in front of the


class. The rest listen to their friends.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to dicuss the
disadvantage of playing Video Games


g©y nghiƯn


Arcade: khu vui chơi, mua bán có mái
vòm


- Read new words and then read the
dialogue aloud in pairs.


- Read the dialogue again and answer the
questions.


- Some pairs perform before the class.
- Compare theiranswers with their partner
then read aloud .


<b>* Anwers:</b>


a) Nam is going to the amusement center.
b) He is going to play Video Games.
c) He often goes there once a week.
d) No, he doesn't.


e) He usually stay there for an hour.


f) Because Video games can be addictive.


g) Nam will have to do his exercise


- Some pairs read aloud before the class.
- Discuss and give the content of the
dialogue.


- Some give their answer.


Nam is going to the amusement center to play
the Video Games. He often goes there once a
week, and he spends there about one hour.
Because Video games can be addictive and
waste money so he plays a little time there.


- Discuss the disadventages of playing
vedio games.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to give the advantage of playing Video Games and disadvantage of Video
Games.


<i><b>5.Home work :</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 on ( p94).
- Learn the dialogue by heart.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


***************************



Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 91. unit 15: going out.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 2: A. Video games (A2)/P148</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic : Video games.
and know the affect of playing Video Games.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 ( p94).


- Ask Ss to give theiropinion about playing Video Games.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to answer the questions:



 Do you play Video Games?


 How often do you play Video Games ?


 How long do you spend time on playing Video Games?


- Ss answers the questions.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce the lesson and ask Ss to give
the affects when they play Video Games.
- Introduce the meaning of new words:


- Read the new words aloud in chorus.
- Ask ss to read the reading in silence and
give the main content of the reading.


- Ask Ss to share the answer to partners.
- Read the answers aloud.


- Ask Ss to read the reading again and then
complete the answers.


- Work in pairs to discuss the answers and
then share the answers to the partners.
- Write the answers on the BB.



- Read the answers aloud.


- Call Ss to read the reading and then
check the answers.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the
reading and then complete the reading ,
using the words given.


- Provide the new words and the meaning
of new words:




<b>A2. Listen and read.</b>


- Give the affect of playing vedio games
then work in pairs to speak in front of the
class.


- Give some words:


+ Dizzy: hoa mắt ,chóng mặt.
+ play out door: chơi ngoài trời.


+ Social skills: kỹ năng giao tiếp xà hội.
- Read the words loudly.


- Read the text in silence then give the
main content of it.



+ The main content of the reading is


the advantages and disadvantages of
playing video games.


- Read their answers aloud.


- Read the text again and complete the
answers.


- Discuss in pairs the answer the questions.
- Write them on the BB.


- Read the text again and check the
answers.


<b>* Guiding for A3:</b>


- Read the passage then try to find correct
words to fill in the blanks using the words
in the box.


- Some words:


Protect the premises: bảo vệ tài sản.


Identify robbers: phát hiện tội phạm


Teaching aid: phơng tiện trợ giảng



Image: hình ảnh


Music industry: ngành công nghiệp AN.


useful: hữu ích


robbery => robber: vụ cớp, tên trộm/cớp


worldwide: toàn cầu/thế giới


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

- Ask Ss to read the new words aloud in
chorus.


- Read the reading and then complete the
reading.


- Work in pairs to give the correct answers.


- Read the reading aloud.


- Read the text and complete the passage.
- Give the correct answers:


1) be . 6) use.


2) have. 7) can.


3) Is 8) will.



4) Identify.9) buy.


5) Are. 10) show.


- Read the text loudly.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask ss to give the advantages and disadvantages of playing Video Games.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise 2+3( p94-95) in the work book. . <b> Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>


- Learn by heart the second passage. <b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


- Prepare for the next lesson


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


****************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 92. test correction.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson ss can eluavate how much they have gained in their tests, encourage
them learn English more as much as they can.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T:The marked tests.


- Ss: Old lesson.


<b>III. Teaching process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Attendence :……7A……… ……… …… ……… …… ………, 7B .., 7C .., .7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Checking along with the new lesson..


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>


<b>Keys and marks</b>



<b>I. 1,5 point (0,3 x 5)</b>


1. interesting 2. likes 3. swimming 4. collecting 5. news


My younger brother, Tim is an active boy. He often does many interesting things. He
likes playing chess with the friend Jack because Jack is a good chess player. In the
summer he often goes swimming and fishes with his classmates. His hobby is


collecting stamps and he has a big collection of foreign stamps. His favorite subjects at
school are Math and English, so he often watches the news of English on TV.



<b>II. 2,0 points (0,5 x 4)</b>


1. Both young and old people.


2. Television stations broardcast many interesting programmes such as: sports, music,
cartoons, contests, movies and news.


3. Yes, we can.


4. We often watch live TV programmes of important events and international football
matches.


5. Ss' answer.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

1. well 2. quickly 3. freely 4. skillfully 5. early


6. slowly 7. fast 8. suddenly 9. hard 10. carelessly


<b>IV. 1,5 points (0,3 x 5)</b>


1. c 2. a 3. b 4. b 5. c


6. c 7. b 8. d 9.c 10. a


<b>V. 1,25 point (0,25 x 5)</b>


1. was 2. doesn't watch 3. to tell 4. spend 5. living- go


<b>VI. 1,0 point (0,5 x 4)</b>



1. She is a bad swimmer.
2. He runs fast.


3. Mai prefers watching TV to going to the theatre.
4. My mother doesn't eat fish and neither do I.
5. Would you like to play tennis with me?


<b>VII. 1,25 point (0,25 x 5)</b>


1. healthy 2. well 3. careful 4. social 5. sensible


<b>VIII. 0,5 point (0,1 x 5)</b>


1. either => too. 2. buyed => bought 3. cooker => cook


4. watching => to watch 5. to better => better


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- T checks whether ss redo the tests.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>**********************************</b>


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 93. unit 15: going out.</b>



Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 3: B. In the city. (B1)/P150</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: The City life with
the busy road, traffic, direction, motorbike etc


- To develop the main skills especially listening and reading skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercises 2+3 ( p94 + 95).


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up:</b>


- Ss to give the disadvantages of playing Video Games, and something they should do.
- Speak aloud before the class.


+ Disadvantages:



- Playing Video Games makes us tired and dizzy.
- Affect to our eyes.


- Waste time and money.
- Affect to Ss' study.


 What should you do?


- Ss should not play Video Games too long.
- Ss should take part in out door activities.
- Ss should play with their friends of same age.


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the text
book and then ask them to discuss about
the life in the city and the life in the
country.


- Work in group to discuss and give their
own opinions:


- Write on the BB.


- Get new words from ss and give the new
words if necessary:


- Read the new words.



- Plays the tape twice and then give the
opinion of Lan and Hoa.


- Read the dialogue in silence and then
work in pairs to give the answers .


- Share the answers to partners.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to role play the
dialogue.


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a patner.</b>


- Compare the differences between the
city's life and the country's life.


- Discuss in groups then give their ideas.


<i><b>In the City</b></i>.


<i><b>In the country</b></i>.


Life is busy.
Life is quiet.


Noisy.
Peaceful


Crowded.
Less people.



Expensive.
Things are cheap.


Easy to buy goods and travel.
Difficult to buy goods and travel.


- Give new words:


The rest of the week: những ngày còn lại
trong tuÇn


A little traffic: it xe cé.


keep ... awake
Busy road: đờng đơng.


Keep (sb) adj: lµm cho ai....


Get/ be used to + V-ing : quen víi.
- Read the words loudly.


- Listen to the tape and show Hoa and Lan'
opinions.


- Read the dialogue and try to answer the
questions.


- Compare their answer with their partners.



<b>* Answer:</b>


a) She goes to school theater once aweek.
The rest of the week , she stays at home.
b) No, she doesn't like the city.


c) Before, Hoa lived in a village near Hue.
d) She like living here because she knew all


the people in her neiborhood; The village
was quiet and there was alittle traffic.
e) She doesn't like the city because it is


noisy and the roads are busy.
f) She hates crossing the road most


because bikes, motorbikes and cars
come from every direction, they scare
her.


- Read the dialogue in pairs before the
class.


<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Ask ss to give the differences of life between the city and the country side.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Prepare for the next lesson.



****************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 94. unit 15: going out.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. In the city. (B2,3)/P151</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to know the differences between the city and the
country side.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercises b1 (96).
- Read by heart the six sents.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>


<b>A. Warm up.</b>
<b>B. Presentation:</b>


Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask Ss to look at the questions in exercise
2 ( p151).


- Ask Ss to note the question b and c.( ask
them to make alist of diferences between
living in the city and living in the country
side.


- Ask Ss to scan the text to get the new
words:


- Give the meaning of new words:


- Read the new words aloud:


<b>B2. Work with a partner. Ask and </b>
<b>answer the questions. </b>


- Look at the questions on the book.


- Give the differences between living in the
country and living in the city.


In the city:



- <i>there are a lot of entertainments: </i>
<i>theaters, cinemas, zoo, parks...</i>
<i>- have chances to study....</i>
<i>- easy to travel.</i>


But:<i><b> - Crowded, noisy, much trafic</b></i>....
In the countryside:


- <i>Quiet, peaceful, a little trafic, and </i>
<i>fresh air.</i>


But:<i> few entertainments, boring, and </i>
<i>difficult to travel...</i>


<b>B3. Read.</b>


- Scan the text and elicit the new words
from it.


<b>* New words:</b>


Help each other: giúp đỡ lẫn nhau.


Far too expensive: quá t


Eat out<i><b>:</b></i> đi ăn hàng


Socialize(n) => social (a): giao lu, giao
tiếp với bạn bè.



Public library: th viện công cộng
After all: rèt cuéc, sau cïng


Get used to+ Ving/N


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

- Ask Ss to read the reading again and
answer the questions: ( work in pairs)


- Ask ss to read the reading and then
asnwer the question about the reading.


- Read the words aloud.


- Read the text then try to answer the
questions in pairs.


 She visits friends.


 They listen to music and talk.


 They help each other with their
home work.


 She plays table tennis and play
chess with her friends.


 She goes to the library and
borrows books.


- Read the text and answer the questions.



1. What did Hoa and her friends do when she
goes out?


2. Why did Hoa rarely go to see a movies or
eat out in the evening?


3. What did she prefer to do ?


4. Why couldn't Hoa read books in the
village?


5. How many books did the public library in
the city have ?


6. Did Hoa get used to living in the city ?


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask ss to note the main content of the lesson:


The differences between the city and the countryside.
- Introduce something you often do in your village.


- Ask ss to give the main content of the reading : living in the city.


5. Home work: <b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise B2+3+ 4 in the work book. <b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>



- Learn new words by heart.
- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


**************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 95. unit 15: going out.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 5: B. In the city. (B4)/P152</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson, Ss will be able to know the differences between the city and the
country side.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>



- Do ex 2,3,4 on the BB, others observe and correct.
- Write new words, read amd make sent.


- Discuss the meaning of the picture and give its meaning.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

-Ask ss to play the net work about the coutries in the world.


England.


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ask ss to look at the pictures in the text
book and then ask them to work in pairs to
give the meaning of each picture.


- Read aloud the sentences:


-Ask Ss to listen to the tape and match the
name with each activity.


- Play the tape three times and ask Ss to
work in pairs to share the answers to
partners and then give the correct answers.
- Ask Ss to read the sentences again.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking
and answering about the activities they did
yesterday.



- Call some pairs to speak aloud in front of
the rest.


- And ask them to speak about the place
they are living.


<b>B4. Listen. Match each name to an each </b>
<b>activity.</b>


- Look at the pictures on the book and give
the meaning of each.


- Read the sentences:<i> </i>


<i> a. Play chess</i>


<i>- play table tennis.</i>
<i>- Listen to music ( CDs).</i>
<i>- See a movie</i>


<i>-Watch a soccer match.</i>
<i>- Go to the restaurant.</i>


- Listen to the tape then match each name
with the right activity.


- Listen again and share their answer with
their friends and read aloud.



Ba: <i><b>played table tennis</b></i>.


Hoa: <i><b>played chess.</b></i>


Nga: <i><b>saw a movie.</b></i>


Nam: <i><b>listened to CDs.</b></i>


Lan: <i><b>went to a restaurant</b></i>.


An: <i><b>watched a soccer match.</b></i>


- Work in pairs to ask and answer the
activities that did yesterday.


P1:-What did you do yesterday evening ?


P2:<i><b> </b></i>I watch a cartoon.


- Some pairs perform before the class.
- Tell something about their living.
Ex:


In my place, the air is fresh and it is


very quiet. The goods here are cheap but not
available...


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>



- Ask ss to note the main content of the lesson:
- Introduce something you often do in your village.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise B5in the work book.
- Learn new words by heart.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


********************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 96. unit 16: People and places.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 1: A. In the city. (A1,2)/P154</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the area and the people in asia
and The Southeast Asia: Such as Bangkok, Hong kong, Kuala Lumpur, Yangon...
- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>



- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercises B4 in the work book.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask ss to play the net work about the coutries in the world.
England.


<b>B. Presentation.</b>


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and then


answer the questions.


- Work in pairs to discuss about the
answers.


- Introduce the new words in the lesson:


- Read the words in chorus then call ss
read individual.


- Introduce about the palces : Where are
those places ?



- Play the tape twice and ask Ss to listen
note the way to read these places.


<b>A1. Listen. Then practice with a partner</b>


- Look at the picture and answer T's
questions.


 Where is the greeting
from?


 Where is Bangkok ?


 What do you know about
Thailand ?


- Discuss the answers in groups.
- Give some new words.




<b>* New words:</b>


Pilot: phi c«ng


It’s his job to fly there: Công việc của
anh là bay tới đó.


album:



Region: vïng, khu vùc


Occasionally: ThØnh tho¶ng.


Hong kong.


Kuala lumpur: thủ đơ Ma Lai
Yangon : thủ đô Myanma
Singapore:


Jakarta: thủ đô Indonesia
Phnom penh: thủ đô Camboda
Vientiane:thur đô Laos


- Read in chorus then in individual
- Introduce about the places:


- Listen to the tape twice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

- Ask ss to read the dialogue and then do
the exercise in the text book (p; 155)


- Match the half sentences: ( work in pairs)
- Call some Ss to give the answers and
correct answers.


- Ask ss to read the text aloud in front of
the class in pairs.


- Ask Ss to give the countries of the name


above and read the countries aloud.


<i><b> </b></i>


- Ask ss to practice asking and answering
the question.


- Read the dialogue and do ex


- Work in pairs to match the half sentence.
- Give the answers then correct.


<b>* Answers:</b>


a) D. (Ba's uncle is a pilot.)


b) F. (Uncle Nghia sends postcards to Ba from
the cities he viosits )


c) B (Ba keeps the postcards as well as the
stamps )


d) C. ( Ba puts the stamps in a special book ).
e) A. ( Hoa wants to see the stamps )


f) E. ( Ba and Hoa would like to visit many
different places )


- Read the answers in pairs.



<b>A2. Complete the table. </b>


- Give the name of the countries above
then read.


Kuala lumpur:<i><b> Malaysia</b></i>


Jakarta:<i><b> Indonesia.</b></i>


Phnom penh<i><b>: Cambodia</b></i>


Vientiane<i><b>: Laos</b></i>


Yangon<i><b> : Myanmar.</b></i>


- Practice asking and answering the
question in pairs.


? Where does Ba's uncle fly to?


He …….flies to ………..


? Where is it?


It's in ………..


<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson : Ba and his uncle.



<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise 1( p99).


- Learn new words and six first sentences by heart.
- Prepare for the next lesson


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>


<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


******************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 97. unit 16: People and places.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009 Lesson 2: A. In the city. (A3,4)/P154


<b>I. Objectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the area, the people and some
destinations in Asia and The South east Asia such as Bangkok, Hong kong, Kuala
Lumpur, Yangon.... and will be known about main character of the places: ancient
monuments, Khmer/ buddist temples, puppet shows, resorts.


- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercises A1 ( p99) in the work book.
- Read the dailogue by heart.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Work in pairs to write the name of these places: Do the Matching.


<b>.</b> Matching a country with its capital.


<i> Countries Capitals.</i>


1. Brunei. a. Jakarta
2. Cambodia b. Vientiane.


3. Indonesia c. Bandar seri Begawan
4. laos d. Phnompenh.


5. Malaysia e. Singapore.
6. Myanmar f. Yangon
7. Singapore g. Manila.
8. Thailand h. Hanoi.



9. The philipines i. Kuala lumpur.
10. Viet nam j. Bangkok.


- Ask ss to read the new words aloud.


<b>B. Presentation: </b>


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Ss work in pairs to practice asking and
answering about Ba’s uncle by using the
questions:


- Ask ss to work in pairs to listen to the
tape and then complete the pilot’s
schedule:


- Share the answer to their partners.


- Call some Ss to write the answers on the
table ( in the clear paper )


- Check the answers if necessary.
- Give the new words.


- Ask ss to read the new words in chorus.
- Ask Ss to look at the chart, then practice


<b>A3. Listen and complete this pilot's </b>
<b>schudule with the correct place names.</b>



- Work in pairs to ask answer the questions


 Where does Ba's uncle fly to ?


He usually/ sometimes/ occasionally
flies to...


 Where is that ?


It is in...


- Listen to the tape and complete pilot's
schudule.


- Compare their answers with their partner.
- Write the answers on the BB


Monday Bangkok and Singapore.


Tuesday Singapore.


Wednesday Jakarta.


Thursday Bali.


Friday Bali


Saturday Hong Kong



Sunday Back to Hanoi


- Some new words:


Fly -> flew.


Baliness dancers; các nghệ sĩ khiêu vũ
đảo Bali.


Cultural show: buæi biểu diễn văn hoá


Stay overnight: qua ờm.
- Read the words in chorus.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

talking about the places that the pilot flew
to.


- Call some Ss to speak aloud in front of
the class


- Elicit the words from ss.


- Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus.
- Ask Ss to read the reading in silence and
then answer the questions in the text book.
- Work in pairs to practice answering .
- Call some Ss to give the correct answers.
- Ask ss to answer the questions given by
teacher:



-Ask ss to read the reading aloud before
the class.


- Ask Ss to find in Vietnam which of the
places have the the kind of tourist
attractions: Ancient monuments, Shows,
and resorts.


- Work in pairs to discuss then ask some to
speak aloud before the class.


<b>A4. Listen and read. Then answer the </b>
<b>questions:</b>


- Give some words:


Khmer / buddist temles: đền thờ ngời khơ
me. Beaches: bờ biển


Puppet shows: biĨu diƠn móa rèi


Attractions: những điểm thu hút khách du
lịch.


Ancient monuments: những lăng mộ cổ


Resort: khu du lịch


Colorful corals: o san hụ.



Admire: khâm phục


Sail; bơi thuyền


range from to …


huge: very very big.
tradition => traditional.


- Read the words in chorus then ask some
to read individual.


- Read the text in silence then answer the
questions.


- Some pairs practice before the class.
- Answers:


Where can you see colorful dances?
in Thailand.


What can you see in Indonesia ?
puppet shows


What can you do when we go to the sea ?
dive, swim, admide colorful corals and
fish and sail


* Answers:



a, They are: Ancient monuments, Puppet


shows, and resort<i><b>.</b></i>


b, Ss' answer.
- Talk about VN.


<i><b>4. Consolidation :</b></i>


- Retell the main content of the lesson.


- Introduce some destinations of Asia especially in VN.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise in the text book A 3+4 on p100-101.
- Learn new words by heart.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


*******************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 98. unit 16: People and places.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about famous people in Vietnam and in
the world: Nguyen Van Giap with the famous place Dien Bien Phu and Romario Pele,
the words: History quiz, General, commander-in chief, defeat, tourist destination, battle
veterans, beautiful scennery, hospitality, ethnic minority, trading center.



- To develop the main skills especially listening and speaking skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to do the exercises A3+4 ( p100-101) in the work book.
- Write new words, read and give the meaning.


<i><b>3. Presentation:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss retell the name of some countries in the south-east Asia.
- Work in pairs to discuss and write the answers on the BB.


<b>Thai land - Laos - Cambodia - Singapore - Indonesia - Malaysia </b>
<b>B. Presentation</b>.


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities


- Introduce somethings about the lesson


and the General: Vo Nguyen Giap.
- Ask Ss the question:


- Ask ss to read the text to answer the
questions.


- Play the tape and introduce the new
words.


- Read the new words aloud.


- Play the tape again and then read the text
to do the exercise True- False.


-Give the correct answers.


<b>B1. Listen. Then practice with a </b>
<b>partner.</b>


- Introduce something about: Vo Nguyen
Giap.


- Answer the questions.


 Do you know about this person ?


 Do you know this famous person who
was in Dien Bien Phu battle ?


- Read the text and answer the questions.


- Listen and give the new words:


<b>* New words:</b>


History quiz: cc thi lÞch sư.


General: đại tớng.


Be famous for: ..nỉi tiÕng vỊ.


Lead: lãnh đạo.


People's Army of Viet Nam: Qn đội nhân
dân Viet nam.


Comander - in chief: tæng chØ huy.


Force: lùc lỵng.


Defeat: đánh bại.


Be good at: ....giái vỊ.


Be interested in:thích , quan tâm đến.
- Read the words aloud.


- Listen to the tape and do ex.
- Compare and correct the answers.


<b>* Answers:</b>



a) False. ( Liz knows nothing about
General Giap.)


b) False .( The People Army of Vietnam
defeated the French in 1954 )


c) True.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

- Check if necessary.


- Ask Ss to role play the dialogue. ( work in
pairs).


- Ask Ss to retell some things about the
General Vo Nguyen Giap in pairs to
discuss.


- Speak aloud before the class.
- Ask ss to do ex.


- Give the words to help ss do ex.


- Ask ss to do ex on the BB, then correct


- Check if necessary.


e) True.


f) False.( Ba will lend Liz some history


books.)


- Practice in pairs to read the dialogue.
- Introduce sth about VNG in pairs then
discuss.


- Perform before the class.


<b>B2. Practice.</b>


- Do ex.


<b>* New words:</b>


clever:
powerful:
gentle:


- Do ex on the BB, others correct.
1. like


2. prefer
3. guess
4. favorite


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson: The General Giap and Dien Bien Phu
battle.



<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise B1,2 ( p101).
- Prepare for the next lesson.


********************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 99. unit 16: People and places.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> Lesson 4: B. Famous people. (B4)/P159</b>



<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about famous people in the world:
Thomas Edison, and Hans Christian Andersen.


- To develop the main skills especially reading skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>



- Ask ss to do the exercise 1, 2 in the text book.
- Work in pairs to fill in the blanks.


- Call some Ss to read the completed dialogue.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make similar dialogue. Using the promts:


A. Do you like My Tam?


B. No , not very much, I prefer My Linh.
A. Why do you prefer My Linh?


B. Because she sings better than My Tam.


- Call some Ss to practice before the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

- Ask ss to retell somethings about Dien Bien Phu.


<b>B.</b> Presentation:


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities


<b>* Pre- reading</b>


- Ask ss to look at the picture and answer
the question:


- Introduce the new words:


- Ask Ss to read the new words aloud.



<b>* While - reading.</b>


- Ask Ss to read the reading and then
answer the questions in the text book.
- Call some Ss to give the answers:


- Check the answers if necessary and give
more meaning of new wods:


- Read the reading aloud.


<b>* Post - reading.</b>


- Ask ss to retell somethings about Dien
Bien Phu.


<b>* Pre- reading:</b>


- Ask ss to look at the picture and then
answer the questions:


<b>* Guide for B3.</b>


- Look at the pictire and answer the
questions.


 <sub>What is the picture about ?</sub>


The picture is about DBPhu.



 Do you know somethings about Dien


Bien Phu?


It is the battle where People’s
army of Viet nam defeated the French in
1954.


- Give the words.


Tourist destination: ®iĨm thu hótlÞch.


Battle veterans: cùu chiÕn binh.


Battle site: trận địa.


Muong thanh valley: thung lũng M.Thanh


Neighboring villages: những ngôi làng bên


Beautiful scenery<i>:</i> cnh p.


Hospitality: lòng hiếu khách


Trading center: trung tâm thơng mại.
- Read the words aloud.


- Read the text then answer the questions
in pairs.



- Some pairs give the answers:


a) People can visit the battle site in Dien
Bien Phu.


b) Tourists can also enjoy the beautiful
scenery of Muong Thanh valley, visit the
neighboring villages and share the
hospitality of the local people.


c) Dien Bien Phu is only 30 kilometers from
the Laos border, so it is an important
trading center.


- Get some more new words.


Local people: ngời dân địa phơng.


Ethnic minority: dân tộc thiểu số


Depend on: phụ thuộc vào


Border: biên giíi


Leave for swh: dời nơi này đến nơi khác.
- Retell something about DBP.


<b>B4. Read.</b>



- Look at the picture and answer T's
questions.


 Who is in the picture ? He is
Thomas Edison.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

- Ask ss to look at the text and then
introduce the new words:


<i><b>- </b></i>Read the new words.


<b>* While - reading.</b>


- Ask ss to read the text and answer the
given questions:


<b>* Post reading</b>.


- Ask ss to work in pairs to play as an
interviewer to ask Thomas Edision or
Andersen.


 <sub>What was he ?</sub>He was an inventor.


 What did he invent ? He
invented the electric light bulp.


- Look at the text and give the words.


<b>* New words:</b>



electric light bulp: bóng đèn điện.


Power station: nhµ máy phát điện


Gramophone: mỏy quay a


Motion pictures: phim điện ảnh.


Poetry: th¬ ca.


Fairy tales<i><b>:</b></i> trun cỉ tÝch
- Read the words aloud.


- Read the text and answer the given
questions.


 <sub>When was Thomas born? - </sub>He was


born in 1847 and died in 1931.


 What did Thomas Edition invent ? -
He invented electric light bulp.


 What was his other inventions?
-They are gramophone, and
motion pictures.


 When was Andersen born? - He



was born in 1805 .


 <sub>When did he die? - </sub>He died in 1875.


 <sub>Was his family rich? - </sub>No, his family
was poor.


 <sub>What did he write ? - H</sub>e wrote
novels, plays, poetry, and travel
books.


- Interview your partner about Thomas or
Andersen the questions like this:


A. When was you born ?


B. I was born in 1847.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Note the main content of the lesson and some structures.


<i><b>5. Home work :</b></i>


- Ask ss to do the exercise B3,4 ( p102).
- Learn new words by heart.


- Prepare for the next lesson.


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>



<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


********************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 100. unit 16: People and places.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about our famous person in our country:
Uncle Ho and after this lesson ss can know how to write or talk about one' biograhpy.
- To develop the main skills especially listening skill.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Tape, cassette, text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask ss to do the exercise 3, 4 in the work book.
- Write new words and read andgive the meanings.



<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<i><b>A. Warm up.</b></i>


- Ask ss to retell somethings about Thomas and Andersen


B. Presentation:


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities


<b>* Pre- listening.</b>


- Ask ss to look at the table and tell
something about Ho Chi Minh.
- Write the new words:


<b>* While - listening.</b>


- Play tape twice .


- Ask Ss to complete the table by listening
to the tape again.


- Give the correct answers
- Write the correct answers .


<b>* Post- listening</b>.


- Ask ss to retell again the life of HCM.


<b>B5. Listen. Complete the table.</b>



- Talk some thing about Unlce Ho.
- Some words will help.


Found Vietnamese Communist Party:


Thành lập đảng cộng sn Vit nam.


Formed Viet Minh front: thành lập mặt trận
Việt Minh


Became president: trở thành chủ tịch.
Ex:


- Uncle ho was born in 1890 in
Lotus village.


- In 1911 he left VN.


- He worked many jobs such as: a


chief, a worker…


- Listen to the tape and try to get
information to complete the table.


- Compare their answers to their friends
then give the correct answers.


- Give the answers in pairs by reading.



<b>* Answers:</b>


Date of birth . 1890 Kim lien
Left Viet nam: 1911 Sai Gon.
Worked in hotel: 1900s London.
Went to others: 1917 Paris.
Moved again: 1923 Moscow.
Founded VN: 1930 Guangzhou.
Formed VM: 1941 Vietnam.


Became president: 1945 Vietnam


Died: 1969 Hanoi.
- Sum up the life of Uncle Ho.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

- Ask ss to retell something about Ho Chi Minh.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Do exercise B5 ( p103).


- Learn new words by heart and prepare for the next lesson.


**************************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 101. Language focus 5</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009



<b> </b>



<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the
vocabulary that they learnt in the second semester of grade 7 .


- To develop the main skills especially reading, writing, and listening skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense?


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up:</b>


- Ask ss to look at the English text book and then note down the main grammar
structures that are leart in the lesson.


 <i> Adjective and advebs.</i>


 <i> Modal verbs.</i>


 <i> Like and dislike.</i>


 <i> The simple and the past form, the future.</i>


<b>B.</b> Presentation.


<i><b> </b></i>Teacher's activities Students' activities
- Ask Ss to review all the grammar that


listed above and then make examples with
these structures.


- Listen to the explaination and ask Ss to
write the sentences on the BB.


- Note anywhere if necessary


- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the
exercises given in the text book.


- Read and give the answers .
- Write the answers on the BB.


<b>I. Theory:</b>


- List the leared grammar points.
- Write them on the BB.



+ Adjective/ adverb


I am quick but I can not run quickly.


+ Modal verbs:


can / may/ should/ ought to / can't + V ...


You should go to the dentist twice a
year.


+ Like and dislike + to V/ Ving:


What would you like for breakfast ?
I’d like fish and fried chicken


+ The simple present and simple past.


I eat banana everyday but
yesterday I ate apple.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<i><b>Ex 1: Adjective and adverb.</b></i>


- Complete the exs in text book.
- Read aloud in pairs the answers
- Write them on the BB.


a) Adjective:



Dangerous, good, bad
b) Adverb:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.
- Work in pairs to make the similar
dialogue, read aloud before the class.


- Write on the BB then read the menu and
then make a dialogue to express what you
like or what you dislike.


- Read the menu first. Then make a
dialogue.


- Put the sents in the correct tenses.


- Use : Why and Because.


B: slowly.
C: good
D: dangerous.
E: skillful.


<i><b>Ex2: Modal verb.</b></i>


- Read the dialogue in pairs.


- Make a similer dialogue then read aloud
before the class.



Ex:


A: Can I <i>play soccer?</i>


B: No , You can’t.
A: Please, Mom.


B: First you must <i>practice playing the </i>


<i>piano. </i>Then you can go.
A: Great! Thanks, Mom.


- Make some advice<i>: Hoa is hot. She </i>


<i>should drink a cool water.</i>
<i><b>Ex 3: Like and dislike.</b></i>


- Write a menu to express what you like or
dislike


- Make a dialogue after reading the menu


<i>Ex:</i>


<i>A: What would you like for lunch , hoa ?</i>
<i>B: I prefer rice, fish, and cucumber salat.</i>
<i>A: Would you like fried chicken ?</i>


<i> B: Yes, that sounds nice.</i>


<i><b>Ex 4: Tense:</b></i>


<b>Past Present Future</b>.
C,e,h a,b,f,g i d,j.


<i><b>Ex 5</b></i>: <i><b>Read and make a similar </b></i>
<i><b>dialogue</b></i>.


- Make dialogue by using Why- because.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask ss to sum up the tenses and their adverbs.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Prepare for the revision and learn by heart the tenses.


********************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 102. Revision</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009


<b> </b>



<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the
vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 .



- To develop the main skills especially reading, writing, and listening skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<b>A. Warm up.</b>


- Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7.


<b>B. Presentation:</b>


<b>I. Grammar and structures:</b>


1. The simple future.


<b>S + will / shall + V + O.</b>


2. The simple past.
<b>S + V-ed + O.</b>



3. The structure with :


<b>either / neither / so / too</b>.


4. Modal verbs:


<b>Can / must/ ought to / should + V-infi...</b>


5. Adjective and adverb.


<b>- Good, well , quick, quickly...</b>


6. The express like and dislike.


<b>To prefer/like+ V- ing.</b>
<b> To </b>–<b> V.</b>


7. Why- because.
8. The structure with :


<b> get used to + V-ing.</b>
<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>- </b>Ask ss to work in pairs to do the exercises.


Ex1: Correct the mistake.


. Hoa <b>prefersreading</b> books <b>toplay</b> video games.



A B C D


2. After <b>each</b> lesson we often <b>havea ten </b>–<b> minutes rest.</b>


A B C D


3. <b>Million</b> of <b>foreign</b> visitors <b>come </b>to Vietnam <b>every year</b>.


A B C D


4. <b>Would</b> you like <b>going </b>to <b>the movies</b> with <b>us</b> tonight?


A B C D


5. My sister <b>likes</b> badminton <b>but</b> she <b>doesn't</b> play it <b>very good</b>.


A B C D


<b>Ex 2:Rewrite the following sentences</b>:


1. Listening to music at home is more interesting than going to the concert.


 <b>I prefer...</b>


2. You shouldn’t eat too much candies.


 <b>You'd...</b>


3. My mother cooks well.



 <b>My mother is a...</b>


4.We didn’t enjoy the trip because of the heavy rain.


 <b>The heavy rain prevented...</b>
<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Ask ss to retell the structures that they learnt in grade 7.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Revise the structures that they learnt in grade 7.
- Redo exs above.


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>


<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 103. Revision</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009


<b>I. Ojectives.</b>


- After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the
vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 and do some exercise to prepare for the test.
- To develop the main skills especially reading, writing, and listening skills.



<b>II. Preparation:</b>


- T: Text book, work sheet and teaching plan.
- Ss: Old lesson, text book and work book.


<b>III. Teaching process. </b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


- Date: ...7A:...7B:...7C………7D…………...


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense?
- Give the tenses and their adverbs, make ex.


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>
<i><b>A. Warm up.</b></i>


Play Kim's games


<i><b>B. Presentation:</b></i> Do exercises:


<i><b> I. Choose the best answer. </b></i>


1. He ...come here last night.


a. doesn’t b. won’t c. didn’t.
2. ...a nice dress !


a.What b. Where c .How.


3. We enjoy... around the world.


a. travel b. traveling c. to travel.
5. You should ...your hands before meals.


a. to wash b.wash c. washing.
6. How ...is Nga ?


a. heavy b. weight c. high.
7.She doesn’t like pork , and ...does her uncle.
a. either b. so c. neither.
8.This river is very... for the swimmers.


a. dangerous b. danger c. dangerously.


<b>II. Underline the correct form of the verbs to complete the following sentences </b>


1. Nam went to the doctor because he ( is / was ) sick.
2. She ( doesn't watch / didn't watch ) television everynight.


3. The children must ( be/ to be) back by six o’clock
4. Many people prefer ( flying / to fly ) to going by sea.


<b>III. Arrange the words into meaningful sentences.</b>


1. Like / dinner / house / would / have / tonight / you / at / to/ my ?
2. Watching / prefers / to / he / books / TV / reading.


3. unhealthy / Sugar / not / an / is / food.
4. eat/ fruit / should / and / we/ vegetables/.



<b>IV.Use the words given to fill in the blanks. </b> <b> </b>


Most of the world’s ...( 1)... is water. We may know the land very well, but we know
very little ...( 2)....the ocean. Until recently, man could not stay underwater for long.
But now, with speacial ( 3)...equipment, a diver can stay longer, After the (4)....of
this equipment, man could swim freely underwater and scuba-diving became a popular
sport. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention.


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- Give some remarks about Ss' work.
- Correct on the BB.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

Ex1. 1,c 2,a 3,b 4,b 5,a 6, a 7c 8, a.


Ex2. 1. was 2, doesn't watch 3, be 4, flying


Ex3. 1. Would you like to have dinner at my house tonight?
2. He prefers reading books to watching TV.


3. Sugar is not an unhealthy food.
4. We should eat fruits and vegetables.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Revise all the main grammartical points.
- Prepare for the final test.


*************************************



Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 104. Test for the 2nd<sub> term</sub></b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


-

To check Ss knowledge after learning the English 7.


- To develop the main skilld especially writing and presenting skills.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>


<b>Questions</b>
<b>I. Listen and fill the words in the blanks.</b>


Football is the most (1)……… game in England. Both young and old people


are (2)………of watching it. Important matches often (3)………….. place at weekends.


As soon as the game begins, people start shouting and cheering for one side or the other.


Some even begin throwing things (4)………..fighting. They only stop doing these


things………….(5) the game finishes.


<b>II. Read then answer the questions.</b>


A lot of people in the world know Glasgow. It is the third largest city in Great
Britain. It lies on the river Clyde in Scotland. Glasgow is a very old city. The university


of Glasgow was founded in 1450. The famous English writer Diel Defoe said that


Glasgow was the cleanest and most beautiful city in Great Britain. James Watt studied at
Glasgow university. He becomes a famous engineer and constructed a steam engine.
Scotland is rich in coal and iron, so Glasgow grows into a large city. There are many big
engineering plants and textile factories in the city.


1. How large is Glasgow?


..


………


2. Where does it lie?


..


………


3. When was the university of Glasgow founded?


..


………


4. Who studied at Glasgow university?


..5.


………



5. What is Scotland rich?


..


………
<b>III. Write the sentences using the cues.</b>


1. Marie curie/ born/ Poland/ 1876.


..


………


2. She/ learn/ read/ write /at/ age/ four.


..


………


3. Shool/ she/ good/ nateral sciences.


..


………


4. Sixteen/ leave school/ and /go/ France/ study.


..



………


5. She/ die/ 1934/ age/ 67.


..


………
<b>IV. Give the correct form of verbs.</b>


1. Nam went to see the doctor because he ( is / was ) sick.
2. She ( doesn't watch / didn't watch ) television everynight.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

4. Many people prefer ( flying / to fly ) to going by sea.


<b>V. Give the correct form of words.</b>


1. One of my………..is ill.(study)


2. Last year there was a district walking...(compete)


3. The noise in the city made me………. last night. (wake)


4. We should eat………to protect our health. (sense)


5. She looks……….because she has a bad mark. (happy)


<b>III. Testing process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Date………..7A………..7B……… ………7C .7D……….



<i><b>2. Deliver the test copies :</b></i>


- T delivers the copies to ss without any explanation.
- Observe ss do the tast independently and strictly.


<i><b>3. Collect the completed tests after the bell.</b></i>


- note the tests are enough or not.


<i><b>4. Remark the test lesson.</b></i>


- Do the tests seriously.


<i><b>5. Homework:</b></i>


- Prepare the next lesson.


*******************************


Preparing date:../../2009 <b>Period 105. test correction.</b>


Teaching date: ../../2009

<b> </b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- After the lesson ss can eluavate how much they have gained in their tests, encourage
them learn English more as much as they can.


<b>II. Preparation:</b>



- T:The marked tests.


- Ss: Old lesson.


<b>III. Teaching process:</b>
<i><b>1. Class settlement:</b></i>


Attendence :……7A……… ……… …… ……… …… ………, 7B .., 7C .., .7D………


<i><b>2. Old lesson check:</b></i>


- Checking along with the new lesson..


<i><b>3. New lesson:</b></i>


<i><b>Keys and marks</b></i>
<b>I. 1,5 point (0,3 x 5)</b>


1. popular 2. fond 3. take 4. and 5. when


Football is the most popular game in England. Both young and old people are
fond watching it. Important matches often take place at weekends. As soon as the game
begins, people start shouting and cheering for one side or the other. Some even begin
throwing things and fighting. They only stop doing these things when the game finishes.


<b>II. 2,0 points (0,4 x 5)</b>


1. It is the third large city in GB.



2. It lies on the river Clyde in Scotland.
3. It was founded in 1450.


4. James Watt studied there.
5. It is rich in coal and iron.


<b>III. 1,0 point (0,2 x 5)</b>


1. Marie Curie was born in Poland in 1876.


2. She learned to read and write at the age of four.
3. At school, she was good at nateral sciences.


4. At sixteen, she left school and went to France to study.
5. She died in 1934 at the age of sixty seven.


<b>IV. 1,0 points (0,25 x 4)</b>


1. was 2. doesn't watch 3. be 4. flying


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

1. students 2. competition 3. awake 4. sensibly 5. unhappy


<b>VI. 1,0 point (0,5 x 4)</b>


1. looks 2. office 3. scared 4. kind 5. explains


6. not 7. them 8. how 9. their 10. brush


<b>VII. 1,5 points (0,15x 10)</b>



1. c 2.b 3.a 4.c 5. b


6.a 7. b 8. b 9. c 10. a


<b>VIII. 0,5 point (0,1 x 5)</b>


1, wrote => write 2, by => on/ own => self 3, to => to be4, a => x 5, told


<i><b>4. Consolidation:</b></i>


- T checks whether ss redo the tests.


<i><b>5. Home work:</b></i>


- Revise all the main points in the English 7.


<b>Ngay… …/</b> <b>/2009</b>


<b>Soạn đủ giáo án trong tuần</b>


<b>Ngun HiỊn</b>


<b>Choose the best answer. Unit 16 ( Revision )</b>



1. He ... come here last night.


a. doesn’t b. won’t c. didn’t.
2. ... a nice dress !


a. How b. Where c. what.


3. We enjoy... around the world.


a. travel b. traveling c. to travel.


4. ...come to the meeting last night? - I was tired last night.
a. Why did you b. When did you c. Why didn’t you .
5. You should ...your hands before meals.


a. to wash b.washing c. wash.
6. How ...is Nga ?


a. high b. weight c. heavy.
7.She doesn’t like pork , and ...does her uncle.


a a. either b. so c. neither.


8. I would like...some fruit and vegetables.
a. buying b. to buy c. buy.
9.This river is very... for the swimmers.


a. danger b. dangerous c. dangerously.
10. They prefer reading ...watching TV.


a. than b. more than c. to.


11. I am sorry. I can’t go to the drama club today. ...about tomorrow ?
a. How. b. When c. Why.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

a. finishes b. finish c. finishing.
14.They don’t drink coffee. ...do their friends.


a. either b. neither c. so.


15. He plays soccer very...


a. goodly b. good c. well.
16. My mother prefers walking ... cycling.
a. for b. at c. to.


17. What would you like ...?- pop music.
a. to watch b. to play c. to listen to.
18. We enjoy... a round the world.


a. travelled b. to travel c. travelling.
19. He ...to the meeting last week.


a. won’t come b. doesn’t come c. didn’t come.
20. What is the ...of Mekong river ?


a. high b. long c. length.
21. What a great ...! – They play very well.
a. band b. bank c. vessel.


22.The students have a... break between two periods.
a. five- minutes b. five minute c. five – minute.
23. Hoa ...the busy city traffic.


a. used to b. uses to c. gets used to .
24. What are the ... of the common cold ?
a. diseases b. symptoms c. medicines.
25. They arrived home at 6.30 ...the evening.


a. in b. on c. at.


26. They will ...to Hue next Sunday.
a. fly b. flew c. flying.


27.He is a famous...


a. invention. b. inventor c. inventive.
28. What is ...Television tonight?


a. in b. on c. at


29. Where ...he born? ( a. is b. does c. was )
<i>Read and then do true </i>–<i> false exercise.</i>


Nowadays, football becomes one of the world’s most popular games. Millions of
people play and watch it all around the world.


A football match often has two parts. Each part is forty- five minutes. The first part is
the first half and the second part is the second half. There is a fifteen – minute break
between the two halves.


There are two teams in a football match. Each football team has eleven players,
Including the goal keeper. The players on the ground try to kick the ball into the other’s
goal. The team which scores more goals wins the match.


...1.Today, football becomes very popular all around


the world.
...2. Millions of people play football.



...3. A football match has two halves of forty- five minutes
each.


...4. There is no break in a football match.


...5. Each football team has eleven players and a goal keeper
in the field.


</div>

<!--links-->

×